Al Wasl Al Jadeed ADPorts Projects

Contract No./Title: 4201-106

Abu Dhabi Ports

Project
Contract No. 4201-106
PROJECT TITLE Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement (Consultancy Services for
KLP-4 & KLP-5):
Particular Specifications ( Architecture, Structure & MEP)

CONTRACTOR’S VERIFICATION STAMP DOCUMENT STATUS STAMP

We, ECG Engineering Consultants Group S.A, verify that this contractor's
document:
• Has been produced and checked in accordance with contractor's quality
assurance plan

• Is of a standard that will enable the employer to accept it in accordance

Ajith Chandran
with the contract
Code 2
04th Jan'21
• Complies with all requirements of the contract ____________________ ______________
Abu Dhabi Ports Code
Following deviations to contract are referenced for which a dispensation has
been accepted by the employer: Code 1: Work may proceed.
None

Other related letters/CTIs which document clarifications associated with this

document are listed below:
✔ Code 2:
Revise & Resubmit. Work may proceed subject to
incorporation of comments indicated.

Code 3: Revise & Resubmit. Work may not proceed.

None
Code 4: Review not required. Work may proceed.
Consultant/Contractor’s Project Manager:
The statement "work may proceed" applies to the following work activities
associated with the matters contained within the contractor's document:

Any review, comment or acceptance by employer under this contract with

Mr. Raghuraman 30.12.2020
respect to any of contractor’s documents shall not in any way be, or deemed to
___________________ ___________________ ___________ be, an approval of any works or an acceptance that the contractor’s documents
Project Manager Signature Date meet the requirements of the contract, as contractor has the sole responsibility
for performing the works in accordance with the requirements of this contract.

Document Number: 4201-106-V2-0000-00001

002
(name & (name & Raghuram
001 30-Dec-2020 Issued for Approval
sign) sign) an
Rev Date Reason For Revision Prepared Checked Approved
Holders of registered copies receive revisions to this document, should they occur, with a request that the superseded copy be destroyed. Registration of copies
eases at taking over date. The revision number is included at the end of the document number, which is noted in the right of the bottom of each page. When
amendments occur, the whole document is re-issued with the revision number updated accordingly.
(1) Revisions are shown in italics. Deletions are hidden. Earlier additions revert to normal text in subsequent amendments
(2) The QA Manager reviews and the project Manager approves amendments by signature on the cover sheet to the document
(3) The document controller maintains a Register of the holders of this document
(4) Amendments to the document are distributed according to (1) above and this I reflected in the register
The document controller keeps the original of the latest version of this document

WorkinProgress
Ref. No.: 4201-106-V2-0000-00001 Rev.001Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
UNCONTROLLED, IF PRINTED
Contract No. 4201-106
Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement
(Consultancy Services for KLP 4 & KLP 5)

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

Rev.01
December 23, 2020

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

 Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement -KLP 4 & 5

Particular Specifications

Index

A) ARCHITECTURAL

B) STRUCTURAL

C) M.E.P

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

 ARCHITECTURAL

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

 

 
REVISION HISTORY - ARCHITECTURAL

Rev Date Description of revision Prepared Checked Authorised

by
By by

0 30/11/2020 MAR JKT MS

1 23/12/2020 Revised per comment from HDR MAR JKT MS

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5    Particular Specifications – Architectural 

 
 

Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement ‐KLP 4 & 5 
Particular Specifications‐ Architectural 
 
 

Table of Contents 
 
1. 5.4. DOUBLE SIDE STEEL FACED PIR INSULATED PANELS – INTERNAL SELF‐SUPPORTING PANEL WALL 
2. METAL COMPOSITE PANELS‐NEW ITEM 
3. 6.7. SPECIAL COATING TO EXPOSED STEEL 
4. BROOM FINISH‐ NEW ITEM 
5. 11.6.  PROPRIETARY SILLS/LINTELS/COPINGS/DRESSINGS 
6. 18. SANITARY WARE / GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT 
7. 26. SAFETY IMPACT BARRIER 
 
ANNEXURE 1 – H43 Metal Composite Panel Cladding / Covering 
ANNEXURE 2 – Sanitary Ware / General Fixtures / Furnishings / Equipment 

 
 
   

    1 
 
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5    Particular Specifications – Architectural 

 
Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 
Particular Specifications‐ Architectural 
Note: These specifications shall be read in conjunction with Construction Specifications for KLP 6 & 7.  
This section covers only those specifications which are either not applicable to and/ or are in variance 
with KLP 6 & 7 specifications 
Sr #  Item reference to KLP 6 & 7 Specifications  Specifications for KLP 4 & 5 
1  5.4.  DOUBLE  SIDE  STEEL  FACED  PIR   
INSULATED  PANELS  –  INTERNAL  SELF‐
SUPPORTING PANEL WALL 
    Provide  high‐index  Polyisocyanurate  (PIR) 
5.4.3 Panels  insulated metal faced sandwich panels fabricated 
from  two  metal  sheets  and  insulation  core 
foamed  in‐factory  and  with  joints  between 
panels designed to form weathertight seals. 
 
Following  characteristics  are  a  minimum  
requirement: 
 
a. Manufacturer:‐ 
Emirates Industrial Panel 
P.O.Box: 115408,Plot No: 598‐1106 
Dubai Investment Park, Dubai. U A E 
Tel: +971 (0)4 8859600 
Fax: +971 (0)4 8859601 
or equal and approved by Architect 
 
b.     Product reference: Emirates Insulated Panel 
– Slightly ribbed Cold Store Panel, CSP 150 
and  other  thicknesses  depending  on 
Architect’s drawings or  similar   approved 
 
All other specifications per KLP 6 & 7 
2  METAL COMPOSITE PANELS‐NEW ITEM  Refer  Specifications  enclosed  in  this  section  ‐  H43 
Metal Composite Panel Cladding/ Covering (Annexure 
1) 
3  6.7.  SPECIAL  COATING  TO  EXPOSED  c. Colour: RAL 9010 
STEEL 
4  BROOM FINISH‐ NEW ITEM  Applicable Location: External Vehicular (fork lift) 
Ramps to approval of the architect. 
5  11.6.    PROPRIETARY  SILLS/  LINTELS/   
COPINGS/ DRESSINGS 
  11.6.2  Thresholds  (To  External  Refer drawings. 
Windows/Doors) 

    2 
 
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 Particular Specifications – Architectural 

Sr #  Item reference to KLP 6 & 7 Specifications  Specifications for KLP 4 & 5 

6  18. SANITARY  WARE  /  GENERAL
FIXTURES  /  FURNISHINGS  /
EQUIPMENT
18.4. Sanitary Fixtures  Refer  specification  &  schedule  enclosed  in  this 
section (Annexure 2) 
7  26. SAFETY IMPACT BARRIER
26.2.  IMPACT  BARRIER  PRODUCTS‐  Armco Barrier‐ Refer detail drawings
NEW ITEM 

3 
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
 ANNEXURE 1
H43 Metal Composite Panel
Cladding - Covering

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

[PROJECT] Technical Specifications
Metal Composite Panel Cladding / Covering

H43 Metal Composite Panel Cladding/ Covering

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. Manufacturer shall be required to have

no less than five years' experience manufacturing metal composite cladding panels, of
equivalent type, size and complexity to that required by the plans and specifications of this
contract. The entire metal composite panel system shall carry a manufacturer's warranty for
20 years from the date of Taking over of the Works.

120A METAL COMPOSITE PANEL COVERING

• Support structure: As indicated on the contract drawings.

- Bearing width: As indicated on the contract drawings.
- Pitch: As indicated on the contract drawings.
• Panels:
- Manufacturer: M/s Aluco panel, Alu bond, Alucobond, Reynobond or approved
equivalent.
Product reference: Factory assembled 4 mm thick panels composed of 100% non-
combustible and fire retardant mineral core sandwiched between two skins of
aluminium/steel sheet (the specialist contractor shall determine if 4 mm thick panels
are suitable for the anticipated wind loading, thermal performance and tolerances).
Ref ALUCOPANEL USA FR A2 or approved equivalent. ACP cladding system shall be in
accordance with the following:-
i) Class A2 when tested as per DIN 4102 & EN 13501-1 or ISO 9705
ii) Class A as per ASTM E84
iii) Noncombustible when tested to ASTM E136 or other equivalent standards.
iv) Fully comply with the current regulation of DCD and Dubai Municiplaity.
- External facing material: 0.5 mm thick aluminium sheet/steel sheet.
Finish: Factory applied KYNAR 500 based PVDF (The top coated surface shall comply
with the "specification for coated coil for exterior building applications" issued by
ECCA "European Coil Coating Association" or AAMA "American Architectural
Manufacturers Association" to achieve the quality level for each association).
Coating shall have a very high UV resistance.
Colour: To the Engineer's selection from the manufacturer's standard range
including metallic colours.
- Internal facing material: 0.5 mm thick aluminium sheet/steel sheet.
Finish: Polyester based wash coating to protect against possible corrosion problems.
Colour: As proposed by the panel manufacturer.
• Core insulation: Min 3 mm thick 100%non-combustible and fire retardant mineral filler
or other material approved by authority.
• Panel thickness: Min 4 mm.
• Panel characteristics:
- Specific gravity: 1.75-1.95
- Panel weight: Min 7.5 Kg/m2
- Bond Integrity - ASTM D1781-76 and ASTM C481 Cycle B-shall be a min. of
178mm N/mm peel strength
- Thermal expansion: 1.2 mm/m/50°C when tested to ASTM D 969
- Apparent thermal conductivity: 0.39 Kcal/m.hr.°C when tested to ASTM D 976 or as
per fire safety consultant report or DCD regulation whichever is more stringent.
- Deflection temperature: 116°C when tested to ASTM D 648
- Tensile strength: 4.5 kg/mm2 when tested to ASTM E 8

H43 Rev. 0 H43/1

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
[PROJECT] Technical Specifications
Metal Composite Panel Cladding / Covering

- Yield strength: 4.5 kg/mm2 when tested to ASTM E 8

- Elongation: 5% when tested to ASTM E 8
- Flexural elasticity: 4060 kg/mm2 when tested to ASTM C 393
- Yield strength of the aluminium skin: 15.5 kg/mm2 when tested to ASTM E 8
- Flexural elasticity of the aluminium skin: 7000 kg/mm2 when tested to ASTM C 393
- Sound transmission class: STC 26 when tested to ASTM E 413
• Min 3-hr fire rated when tested to ASTM E 119 or fire rating as per DCD regulation or per
fire safety consultant report.
• Joint type: Butt joint with silicone sealant as section Z22 (the specialist contractor shall
provide all necessary accessories to achieve a weather tight joint).
• Accessories: The finished surface shall be protected with a self-adhesive peel-off
protective film with two layers (white and black), tested to withstand at least six month
exposure to local weather conditions without losing the original peel-off characteristic or
causing stains or other damage.
• Primary fasteners: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Engineer's
approval. Shall be stainless steel non- corrosive grade.
- Number and location of fasteners: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to
the Engineer's approval.
• Panel Tolerances:
- Width: ±2 mm.
- Length: ±4 mm.
- Thickness: ±0.2 mm.
- Bow: Maximum 5% of the length and/ or width.
- Squareness: Maximum 5 mm.
• Special features/requirements:

- Aluminium composite materials and its core both shall be tested, certified and
approved by Dubai Civil Defense. Contractor shall use only Civil Defense approved
products/systems in the project and shall be responsible for obtaining DCD approval
for all site installations. Also contractor shall be responsible for arranging inspection
by DCD approved House of Expertise on site installation at 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and
100% and submit reports for each stage for Civil Defense submission.
- Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Dubai Municipality circular #215
concerning fire protection and prohibited use of combustible materials in building
and façade cladding.
- Waterproofing to the backing walls shall be as specified in section J30.
- Thermal insulation to the backing walls shall be as specified in section P10.
- Aluminium composite panel cladding shall not be fixed directly to walls made of
aerated concrete blocks or hollow concrete blocks or gypsum board. The specialist
contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and fixing of alternative fixing
methods to the Engineer's approval.
- For covering panels with "solid colours", a two-coat, two bake coating system shall
be applied. The total dry film thickness shall be 25 microns (minimum) and shall
consist of a conversion coat, an inhibitive primer and PVDF colour coat.
- For covering panels with "metallic colours", a three-coat, three bake coating system
shall be applied. The total dry film thickness shall be 35 microns (minimum) and shall
consist of a conversion coat, an inhibitive primer, metallic and clear PVDF coat.
- The panel surface shall not have any irregularities such as roughness, buckling or
other visual imperfection that exceed the specification guidelines of visual
inspection.
- Aluminium or stainless steel rivets, bolts and/ or screws, and several adhesives and

H43 Rev. 0 H43/2

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
[PROJECT] Technical Specifications
Metal Composite Panel Cladding / Covering

two-sided adhesive tapes shall be used to join the panels to different kinds of
metals.
- All fixing accessories shall be stainless steel non corrosive grade.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

170 DESIGN

• Cladding: Complete detailed design of the cladding system and submit before
commencement of fabrication.
- Standard: To BS 5427-1 and local authority regulations.
• Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.

172 THERMAL PERFORMANCE/ BRIDGING

• Requirement: Complete thermal design of the cladding/ covering system to avoid

excessive thermal bridging.
- Standard: MCRMA Technical Paper 14 and DM green building regulation.

175 PRODUCT SAMPLES

• General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labeled samples of the following:
All products specified in this section and applicable to the project

176 FASTENER SAMPLES

• General: During detailed design, submit labeled samples of each type of fastener.

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

185 PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE

• Verification: Before commencing fabrication, submit evidence based on laboratory

testing or computer modeling.
- Verifying authority: An independent testing laboratory approved by Dubai civil
defense.

187 DEFLECTION OF METAL CLADDING/ COVERING

• Roof covering: Maximum permitted deflection under distributed loads as a multiple of

span and due to:
- Dead load: L/500.
- Dead and imposed loads: L/200.
- Dead and wind loads: L/90.
• Wall cladding: Maximum permitted deflection under distributed loads as a multiple of
span and due to:
- Dead and wind loads: L/120.

193A SOUND TRANSMITTANCE OF CLADDING/ COVERING SYSTEM - FREQUENCY SPECIFIC

H43 Rev. 0 H43/3

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
[PROJECT] Technical Specifications
Metal Composite Panel Cladding / Covering

The complete cladding/ covering system including cladding/ covering panel, thermal
insulation, waterproofing, backing walls and internal finishes, shall provide the following
minimum sound reduction indices (in dB) when measured in a laboratory complying with EN
ISO 140-3.

A. Elevations facing cooling towers or other mechanical equipment:

Octave Band Centre Frequency Sound reduction indices (minimum)
125 Hz 25 dB
250 Hz 35 dB
500 Hz 41 dB
1000 Hz 48 dB
2000 Hz 49 dB
4000Hz 47 dB

B. Other elevations:
Octave Band Centre Frequency Sound reduction indices (minimum)
125 Hz 20 dB
250 Hz 23 dB
500 Hz 20 dB
1000 Hz 20 dB
2000 Hz 21dB
4000Hz 19dB
• Other requirements:
- Testing shall be carried out by the main contractor.
- Any openable doors or windows are to be shut during testing.
- A sample size of at least 10m2 shall be used and shall include the interface with the
floor junction.

195A INTEGRITY OF CLADDING/ COVERING

• Requirement: Determine profiles, sizes and thicknesses of panels and sheets, the sizes,
number and spacing of fixings, and incorporation of other accessories and fittings to
ensure cladding/ covering system will resist factored dead, imposed and design live
loads, and accommodate deflections and thermal movements without damage, in
accordance with BS 5427-1.
• Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2, Standard Method and BS 5427-1 appropriate to
location, exposure, height, building shape and size, taking account of existing and known
future adjacent structures.
- Basic wind speed (Vb): As indicated on the structural contract drawings.
- Altitude factor (Sa): 1.
- Direction factor (Sd): 1.
- Seasonal factor (Ss): 1.
- Probability factor (Sp): 1.
- Terrain and building factor (Sb): Variable.
- External and internal size effect factors (Ca): 1.
- External pressure coefficients (Cpe): As determined from BS 6399-2, clauses 2.4 and
2.5.
- Internal pressure coefficients (Cpi): As determined from BS 6399-2, clause 2.6.
- Dominant opening: Service doors to be considered as open.
• Imposed roof load (no access): As determined from BS 6399-3 and BS 5427-1.

H43 Rev. 0 H43/4

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
[PROJECT] Technical Specifications
Metal Composite Panel Cladding / Covering

• Permanent imposed roof loads: As indicated on the architectural, structural and MEP
contract drawings.
• Temporary imposed roof loads: Maintenance access equipment and personnel.

198 WATER PENETRATION

• Requirement: Under site exposure conditions, moisture must not penetrate onto
internal surfaces, or into cavities not designed to be wetted.

200A AVOIDANCE OF INTERSTITIAL CONDENSATION

• Requirement: Determine interstitial condensation risk of cladding system using the

method described in BS 5250 Appendix D. If necessary, provide a vapour control layer to
ensure that damage and nuisance from interstitial condensation does not occur.
• Outdoor psychrometric conditions (notional): To BS 6229, table 6 as follows:
Winter Summer
- Temperature 10°C 32°C
- Relative humidity 100% 89%
- Vapour pressure 1.227 kPa 4.207 kPa
• Indoor psychrometric conditions (notional): As follows:
- Temperature: 24 °C.
- Relative humidity: 55 %.
- Vapour pressure: 1.660 kPa.

202 AVOIDANCE OF SURFACE CONDENSATION

• Requirement: Determine surface condensation risk of cladding system using the method
described in BS EN ISO 13788. If necessary, revise thermal insulation to provide
satisfactory temperature factor (fmin). Ensure that damage and nuisance from surface
condensation and does not occur.

FIXING CLADDING/ COVERING

215 PAINTING STRUCTURE

• Sequence: Paint outer surface of supporting structure before fixing cladding/ covering.

219 FASTENERS

• Unspecified fasteners: Recommended for the purpose by the cladding/ covering

manufacturer.

221 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

• Unspecified fittings and accessories: Recommended for the purpose by the cladding/
covering manufacturer.

223 PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYTIC ACTION

H43 Rev. 0 H43/5

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
[PROJECT] Technical Specifications
Metal Composite Panel Cladding / Covering

• Isolating tape: Type recommended by cladding/ covering manufacturer.

- Location: To contact surfaces of supports and sheets of dissimilar metals.

234 GUTTERS TO ROOFS

• Refer to Section H31 of this document

275 CONTINUITY THERMAL INSULATION

• Material: Mineral wool insulation as section P10.

- Manufacturer: Fujairah rock wool and Saudi rock wool.
Product reference: As recommended by the facade cladding manufacturer subject to
the authority approval.
• Installation: Secure and continuous with cladding/ covering insulation.

300 PROFILE FILLERS GENERALLY

• Material: Closed cell ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) synthetic rubber.
• Manufacturer: Plastazote, Paulamar UK or approved equivalent.
- Product references: Density 45Kg/m3 to suit the profile to Engineer’s approval. Shall
be weather resistant and UV resistant.
• Colour: Black.
• Thickness: 50 mm.
• Fixing method: Self-adhesive tape and riveted to avoid fall.
- Requirement: To close cavities within the external envelope. Tight fit with no
unintended gaps.

410 FIXING PANELS AND SHEETS GENERALLY

• Cut edges: Clean true.

• Penetrations: Openings to minimum size necessary.
- Edge reinforcement: Aluminium sections to details.
• Orientation: Exposed joints of side laps away from prevailing wind unless shown
otherwise on drawings.
• Panel and sheet ends, laps and raking cut edges: Fully supported and with fixings at top
of lap.
• Fasteners: Drill holes. Position at regular intervals in straight lines, centered on support
bearings.
- Position of fasteners in oversized drilled holes: Central.
- Fasteners torque: Sufficient to correctly compress washers.
• Debris: Remove dust and other foreign matter before finally fixing panel and sheets.
• Completion: Check fixings to ensure water tightness and that panels and sheets are
secure.
• Cut edges: Paint to match face finish.

470 STRUCTURAL MOVEMENT JOINTS

• Type: Cover flashing fixed on one side over gap between panels.
• Location: Coincident with structural movement joint.

H43 Rev. 0 H43/6

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
[PROJECT] Technical Specifications
Metal Composite Panel Cladding / Covering

• Width of gap: To match structural movement joint requirements.

• Requirement: Weather tight.

480 FLASHINGS/ TRIMS GENERALLY

• Lap joint treatment:

- Vertical and sloping flashings/ trims: End laps to be same as for adjacent panels.
- Horizontal flashings/ trims: End laps to be min 150 mm, sealed and where possible
arranged with laps away from prevailing wind.
• Method of fixing: To structure in conjunction with adjacent panels. Otherwise to panels.
- Fasteners: As recommended by the manufacturer subject to the Engineer's approval.

482 BUTT JOINTED FLASHINGS/ TRIMS

• Locations: As indicated on the contract drawings.

• Butt straps: 300 mm wide and made from sheet of same material and finish.
• Butt joints: Seal.

540 ABUTMENTS

• Junctions with flashings: Weather tight and neatly dressed down.

550 SEALING EXTERNAL LAPS

• Sealant tape: Types recommended by panel/ sheet manufacturer.

• Position of tape: Below fixing positions in straight unbroken lines, parallel to and slightly
back from edge of panel/ sheet.
• Seal quality: Effective, continuous and not over compressed.
• End laps: Sealant tape positions:
- Single line tape: Immediately below line of fasteners.
- Second line tape (where specified): Slightly set back from the edge of external sheet.
• Side laps: Sealant tape positions:
- Single line tape: Outside line of fasteners.
- Second line tape (where specified): On other side of fasteners.

560 SAFETY SIGNS

• Fixing locations of signs: As indicated on drawings.

• Manufacturer: As recommended by the specialist contractor subject to the Engineer's
approval.
- Product reference: As recommended by the specialist contractor subject to the
Engineer's approval.
• Material: Aluminium with polyester powder coated base, screen printed graphics.
• Signs description:
Hazard sign as BS 5499-5, code 8.C.0072 with supplementary text sign, lettering
'DANGER fragile roof'.
General sign with mandatory instruction to BS 5499-5, code 11.A.0103 with
supplementary text sign, 'Use crawling boards'.

END OF SECTION

H43 Rev. 0 H43/7

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
 ANNEXURE 2
Sanitary Ware / General Fixtures /
Furnishings / Equipment

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

 Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement -KLP 4 & 5
Particular Specifications- Sanitary ware

Table of Contents
1.0 SANITARY WARE / GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT............................ 2
1.1. SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR’S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES ................. 2
1.2. DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3. SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................................. 2
1.4. SANITARY FIXTURES ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.4.1 Water Closets (To All Toilets) ...................................................................................................... 3
1.4.2 Shower Head with Arm ............................................................................................................... 3
1.4.3 Shower Mixer .............................................................................................................................. 4
1.4.4 Soap Basket ................................................................................................................................. 4
1.4.5 Faucets ........................................................................................................................................ 4
1.4.6 Toilet Paper Roll Holder .............................................................................................................. 5
1.4.7 Floor Drain .................................................................................................................................. 5
1.4.8 Robe Hook................................................................................................................................... 6
1.4.9 Wash Basins (Toilets With Counters) .......................................................................................... 6
1.4.10 Mixer Tap .................................................................................................................................... 7
1.4.11 Soap Dispenser (Toilets) .............................................................................................................. 7
1.4.12 Hand Towel Dispenser (Toilets) .................................................................................................. 7
1.4.13 Water closets (P.O.D. Toilets) ..................................................................................................... 8
1.4.14 1200 mm grab bars (P.O.D. toilets) ............................................................................................. 8
1.4.15 900 mm grab bars (P.O.D. toilets) ............................................................................................... 8
1.4.16 850 mm grab bars (P.O.D. toilets) ............................................................................................... 9
1.4.17 Wash basins (P.O.D. Toilets) ....................................................................................................... 9
1.4.18 Faucets (Steel Sinks Only – At Pantry, Kitchen, Etc) .................................................................... 9
1.4.19 Steel Sink (Pantry) ..................................................................................................................... 10
1.4.20 Faucets (Ablution) ..................................................................................................................... 10
1.4.21 Benches To Staff Locker Area .................................................................................................... 10
1.4.22 Lockers to Locker Room ............................................................................................................ 10
1.4.23 Mirror to Toilet ......................................................................................................................... 11
1.4.24 Pedal Bin to Staff Toilet ............................................................................................................. 11
1.4.25 Waste Bin to Staff Toilet Counters ............................................................................................ 11

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 Sanitary ware

Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement-KLP 4 & 5

Particular Specifications- Sanitary ware

1.0 SANITARY WARE / GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT

1.1. SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR’S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

a. The Employer's Requirements are set out in:

b. The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
c. The specifications included in this Section.
d. The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or
implied within these conditions.

1.2. DOCUMENTS

The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method

statements and all other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the
works and approved by the Architect prior to construction works in accordance
with the Conditions and General Preliminaries.

1.3. SCOPE OF WORK

a. The Contractor is to supply and install all Vanity and Toilet Furniture, Fire Hose
Reels, lockers, Changing room furniture in accordance with this specification.
The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
i. Vanity and Bathroom Furniture to staff areas allowing to interface with all
associated items such as sanitary fittings, all pipe connections, structural
support, sealants, insulation, and ancillary items etc.
ii. Fire hose reels to all areas allowing for all associated trims, sealants, pipe
connections and ancillary items etc.
iii. All adhesive fixings.
iv. All grouting etc.
v. All movement joints, expansion joints etc.
vi. All proof calculations and certification to comply with all specification and
all test data to prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
vii. Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and
form of all relevant details, setting out, including joints, edge details,
expansion joint, service penetrations, abutments stops, steps and interface
details to adjacent construction.
viii. All horizontal and waste pipework within toilet areas are to be concealed
with suitable maintenance access.
ix. Taps, sanitary fixtures or fittings to be Ideal Standard or Similar Approved
(Subject to client`s approval).
x. Toilets are to be used in conjunction with a metal studwork framed
independent panel system to house all cisterns and pipework
connections; Subject to Client`s approval.
xi. WC shall be operated by a dual flush system along with soft close seats
are to be used.
xii. Matt Stainless steel sinks to Working corridor area as per drawings
xiii. Necessary paper towel dispensers shall be provided in toilet areas.
xiv. To be as per Green building requirements and must comply with other
local regulations

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

2
Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 Sanitary ware

1.4. SANITARY FIXTURES

1.4.1 Water Closets (To All Toilets)

a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: MP 27AWHA
c. Product Name: Metropolitan Water Closet Close Coupled Siphonic
69cm
d. Colour: ALPINE WHITE
e. Material: Ceramic
f. Weight: 52 kg
g. Size: 695 X 340 MM
h. Trap Type: S Trap
i. Trap way Type: Concealed
j. Seat Cover Options: ABS & Urea
k. Bowl Shape: Rounded Rectangle
l. Soft Close: yes
m. Fixation: Hidden Fixation System
n. Dual Flush: Yes
o. Tank Capacity: 6L (factory Setting) 30% adjustable reduction to 4.5 L
p. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation.
q. Accessories: All accessories to make this product fully functioning at its
best.

1.4.2 Shower Head with Arm

a. Manufacturer:
Bagno Design London
Tel: +971 4 507 6000
Email: [email protected]
or similar approved by Architect
b. Supplier:
Sanipex LLC
Sheikh Zayed Road,
Dubai United Arab Emirates,
P.O. Box: 30871,
or similar approved by Architect
c. Product reference: BDD-PAL-552-CP
d. Product name: Palma II Shower Head with Arm 230mm dia.
e. Minimum Operationg Pressure: 1.0 Bar MP
f. Material: Brass
g. Finish: Chrome
h. Connection Size ½” Size: 230mm dia.
i. Warranty: Contractor to provide lifetime warranty on tank and carrier,
10-year warranty on fill valve and flush valve and One-year warranty on
actuator flush plates from the time of installation.

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 Sanitary ware

1.4.3 Shower Mixer

a. Manufacturer:
Aquazone
Tel: +971 4 507 6000
Email: [email protected]
or similar approved by Architect
b. Supplier:
Sanipex LLC
Sheikh Zayed Road,
Dubai United Arab Emirates,
P.O. Box: 30871,
or similar approved by Architect
c. Product reference: AQE-EMB-410-CP
d. Product Name: Embassy Concealed Shower Mixer
e. Color: Chrome Finish
f. Material: Brass Material
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum one-year warranty.

1.4.4 Soap Basket

a. Manufacturer:
Bagno Design London
Tel: +971 4 507 6000
Email: [email protected]
or similar approved by Architect
b. Supplier:
Sanipex LLC
Sheikh Zayed Road,
Dubai United Arab Emirates,
P.O. Box: 30871,
or similar approved by Architect
c. Product reference: BDA-HOT-622-A-CP
d. Product Name: Hotel Soap Basket
e. Color: Chrome Finish
f. Material: Brass Material
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum one-year warranty.

1.4.5 Faucets
(Same to be supplied for Water Closets)
a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: STAR FAUCET
c. Colour: Chrome
d. Material: Stainless Steel
e. Handset wall Braces: yes
f. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 Sanitary ware

1.4.6 Toilet Paper Roll Holder

(Same to be supplied for Toilets)
a. Manufacturer:
Bagno Desig n London
Tel: +971 4 507 6000
Email: [email protected]
or similar approved by Architect
b. Supplier:
Sanipex LLC
Sheikh Zayed Road,
Dubai United Arab Emirates,
P.O. Box: 30871,
or similar approved by Architect
c. Product reference: UNA-ROL-POL
d. WW.accessories.Una Roll Holder
e. Size: 170mm x 65 mm
f. Material: Polished Chrome
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation

1.4.7 Floor Drain

(Same to be supplied for Toilets and Pantry)
a. Manufacturer:
AQUAZONE
Tel: +971 4 507 6000
Email: [email protected]
or similar approved by Architect
b. Supplier:
Sanipex LLC
Sheikh Zayed Road,
Dubai United Arab Emirates,
P.O. Box: 30871,
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: AQD-615P-SS
c. Item: Aquadrain Floor Drain with Vertical Outlet
d. Size: 150 mm x 150 mm
e. Material: Polished Stainless Steel
f. Connection Size: 110mm dia.
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 Sanitary ware

1.4.8 Robe Hook

a. Manufacturer:
Bagno Design London
Tel: +971 4 507 6000
Email: [email protected]
or similar approved by Architect
b. Supplier:
Sanipex LLC
Sheikh Zayed Road,
Dubai United Arab Emirates,
P.O. Box: 30871,
or similar approved by Architect
c. Product reference: AQE-WIN-706-CP
d. Item: Windemere Single Robe Hook
e. Size: 50mm dia. x 39mm
f. Material: Zinc Alloy Material – Chrome Finish
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation.

1.4.9 Wash Basins (Toilets With Counters)

a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: OC05AWHA
c. Cherry Wash Basin 63 cm
d. Colour: Alpine white
e. Material: Ceramic
f. Weight: 12 kg
g. Size: 565 X 390 mm
h. Type: Drop In
i. Basin Shape: Oval
j. Overflow hole: yes
k. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation.
l. Accessories: All accessories to make this product fully functioning at
its best.

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 Sanitary ware

1.4.10 Mixer Tap

(Same to be supplied for Toilets)
a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: RAKCOM3001
c. Compact Mono Basin Mixer tap Cool Start
d. Colour: Chrome
e. Material: Stainless Steel
f. Weight: 1.75 kg
g. Size: 165mm x 150 mm
h. Cartridge: yes
i. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation

1.4.11 Soap Dispenser (Toilets)

(Same to be provided in Toilets)
a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: RAKSPH9907
c. Product Name: Sphere Soap Dispenser & Holder
d. Colour: Silver
e. Material: Brass with Chrome Plating
f. Weight: 0.54 kg
g. Size: 113mm x 216 x 1115 mm
h. Type: Drop In
i. Fixing: Supplied with back plate for concealed fittings
j. Thickness: Chrome 0.3 Um, Nickle 6019 UM
k. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum two-year warranty from the
time of installation.

1.4.12 Hand Towel Dispenser (Toilets)

(Same to be provided in Toilets)
a. Manufacturer:
Kimberly – Clark Australia Pty. Limited (Headquarters)
b. Product Reference: ABN 65 000 032 333 52 Alfred Street Milsons Point
NSW 2061
or similar approved by Architect
c. Product reference: 4944 Optimum Towel Dispenser
d. Material: White
e. Size: 258 mm x 536 mm x 85mm
f. Type: Wall Mounted
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum two-year warranty from the
time of installation.

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 Sanitary ware

1.4.13 Water closets (P.O.D. Toilets)

a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: CO23AWHA
c. Product Name: Compact Water Closet Rimless Wall Hung 70cm
d. Colour: ALPINE WHITE
e. Material: Ceramic
f. Weight: 30 kg
g. Size: 700 x 365 MM
h. Trap Type: P Trap
i. Trap way Type: Concealed
j. Seat Cover Options: Urea
k. Bowl Shape: Oval
l. Soft Close: yes
m. Fixation: Hidden Fixation System
n. Dual Flush: Yes
o. Tank Capacity: 6L (factory Setting) 30% adjustable reduction to 4.5 L
p. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation.
q. Accessories: All accessories to make this product fully functioning at
its best.

1.4.14 1200 mm grab bars (P.O.D. toilets)

a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: SILGBR01200
c. Product Name: RAK-SILVER GRAB BARS – 1200 mm
d. Size: 1200 mm x 82 mm
e. Weight: 2 kg
f. Material: Stainless Steel
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation

1.4.15 900 mm grab bars (P.O.D. toilets)

a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: SILGBR00900
c. Product Name: RAK-SILVER GRAB BARS – 900 mm
d. Size: 900 mm x 82 mm
e. Weight: 2 kg
f. Material: Stainless Steel
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 Sanitary ware

1.4.16 850 mm grab bars (P.O.D. toilets)

a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: SILGBRPH001
c. Product Name: RAK-SILVER GRAB BARS – 850 mm
d. Size: 850mm x 216 mm
e. Weight: 3 kg
f. Material: Stainless Steel
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation

1.4.17 Wash basins (P.O.D. Toilets)

a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: VN0401AWHA
c. Product Name: Venice Half Pedestal
d. Colour: Alpine white
e. Material: Ceramic
f. Weight: 24 kg
g. Size: 650 x 510 mm
h. Type: Half Pedestal
i. Basin Shape: Oval
j. Overflow hole: yes
k. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation.

1.4.18 Faucets (Steel Sinks Only – At Pantry, Kitchen, Etc)

a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
RAK CERAMICS (HEADQUARTERS)
P.O. Box 4714 Ras Al Khaimah
United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 7 2445046
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: RAKKIT004
c. Kitchen Sink Mixer Tap Side Lever
d. Colour: Chrome
e. Weight: 2.00 kg
f. Cartridge: yes
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

1.4.19 Steel Sink (Pantry)
a. Manufacturer:
REGINOX
Tel: +971 4 507 6000
Email: [email protected]
or similar approved by Architect
b. Supplier:
Sanipex LLC
Sheikh Zayed Road,
Dubai United Arab Emirates,
P.O. Box: 30871,
or similar approved by Architect
c. Product reference: REG-CEN-30-R-SS
d. Item: Centurio Kitchen Sink
e. Material: Stainless Steel
f. Bowl: Double with Drain
g. Size: 1160mm x 600 mm
h. Connection Size: 1 1/2”
i. Warranty: Contractor to provide lifetime warranty from the time of
installation

1.4.20 Faucets (Ablution)

a. Manufacturer/ Supplier:
200 N Gary Av Suite G (HEADQUARTERS)
Roselle, IL 60172, USA Tel: 630 582 7711
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: 36266000
c. Product Name: ½” Self-Closing Faucet with mixer
d. Material: Stainless steel
e. Flow time adjustable to 15 seconds
f. Type: Wall mounted
g. Warranty: Contractor to provide minimum 1-year warranty from the
time of installation.

1.4.21 Benches To Staff Locker Area

a. Manufacturer:
Gibca Furniture Industry Co Ltd, PO Box 20923, Ajman, UAE.
Tel: +971 6 743 68888
or similar approved by Architect
b. Product reference: Small Locker room bench ref: G/LB-43 - for size refer
to Architect's drawings and bench to apt for locker room area.
c. Material: High pressure laminate and powder coated steel.
d. Finish/ Colour: RAL 7002 - Olive Grey.
e. Fittings: Adjustable feet.

1.4.22 Lockers to Locker Room

a. Manufacturer:
Whittan Group Halesfield 6, Telford Shropshire
TF7 4LN, United Kingdom Tel: (+44) 1952 682251

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

 E-mail: [email protected]
b. Product reference: Four-Tier Locker – standard steel locker, Refer to
architect's drawings for location and number.
c. Size: 1800mm(H) x 300mm(W) x 450mm(D)
d. Standard: To BS 4680.
e. Test level: Heavy.
f. Material: High pressure laminate.
g. Finish/ Colour: RAL 7002 - Olive Grey.
h. Fittings: comes complete with all fittings.
i. Other requirements: Keyed lock.

1.4.23 Mirror to Toilet

a. Material: Class C safety glass to BS 6206.

b. Quality: Free from tarnishing, discoloration, scratches and other
defects visible in the designed viewing conditions. Reflection
undistorted.
c. Size: Wall mounted to match the length of the counter with 1m height.
d. Backing: Lacquer.
e. Edges: rounded.
f. Fixing: Stainless steel concealed brackets or clips
g. Installation: Accurately with sides vertical.

1.4.24 Pedal Bin to Staff Toilet

a. Manufacturer: Bagno Hotel

b. Supplier: Sanipex LLC.
PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771
Fax: 00971 4 330 7177
Or similar approved
c. Product Description: 5 litre capacity pedal bin
d. Product reference: DGM-2614068Z-5N-CP
e. Finish: Chrome

1.4.25 Waste Bin to Staff Toilet Counters

a. Manufacturer: TBC
b. Supplier:
TBC and approved
c. Product Description: 10 litre capacity pedal bin
d. Product reference: TBC
e. Finish: Chrome
f. Must be integrated into the counter and a hole provided on counter
slab to allow for waste to be dropped. Waste container to be kept
inside the counter and not to be seen outside.

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

 STRUCTURAL

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

 

   

 
REVISION HISTORY - STRUCTURAL

Rev Date Description of revision Prepared Checked Authorised

by
By by

0 30/11/2020 DR DR MS

1 23/12/2020 Revisd as per comments from HDR DR DR MS

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement‐KLP 4 & 5    Particular Specifications – Structural 

 
   
Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 
Particular Specifications‐ Structural 
 
 

Table of Contents 
 
1. 3.8 SUBSOIL DATA 
2. 3.11.4 PLATE BEARING TESTS BELOW BUILDING AREA 
3. 3.12.2  ISOLATED FOUNDATIONS 
4. 3.27   COMPACTION OF FILLING 
5. 4.1.1  GENERAL 
6. 4.2.  GROUND BEARING INTERNAL FLOOR SLAB (DISTRIBUTION WAREHOUSE) 
7. 6.3.5 ADJUSTMENTS TO MIX PROPORTIONS 

  ANNEXURE 1 :  GRADE SLAB FOR WAREHOUSE/SHOWROOM/LIU
 

 
 
   

    1 
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
 
Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement‐KLP 4 & 5    Particular Specifications – Structural 

 
Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 
Particular Specifications‐ Structural 
Note: These specifications shall be read in conjunction with Construction Specifications for KLP 6 & 7.  
 
This section covers only those specifications which are either not applicable to and/ or are in variance 
with KLP 6 & 7 specifications 
Sr #  Item reference to KLP 6 & 7 Specifications  Specifications for KLP 4 & 5 
1  3.8 SUBSOIL DATA  a) Soil report ref. 4201‐232‐V3‐0000‐00003‐002 
Critical Warehousing Capacity Enhancement 
dated 24th Oct’20 for the site is available to 
the  Contractor  for  his  information.  The 
report is intended solely as a preliminary and 
approximate  guide  to  the  nature  of  ground 
stratification and soil properties used for the 
design  of  civil  and  structural  elements.  The 
completeness  and  the  accuracy  of  the 
information  provided  is  neither  guaranteed 
nor implied. No responsibility is assumed by 
the Employer or the Engineer for any opinion 
or conclusion given in the soil report. 
2  3.11.4 PLATE BEARING TESTS BELOW  a) If  not  provided  by  Specialist  Groundworks 
BUILDING AREA  Contractor or determined through the plate test 
taken on the final formation or bearing fill surface 
noted  above,  minimum  frequency  of  plate 
bearing  tests  to  be  carried  out  at  level  to 
underside of sub‐base (on top of fill material in fill 
areas), using 750mm diameter plate bearing tests 
in accordance with BS1377 (Part 9) to determine 
CBR or equivalent plate bearing test to determine 
equivalent K value in accordance with Highways 
Agency specification HD 25/94 as follow 5No for 
buildings  from  B8‐B11  and  3No  for  B1‐B7&B12 
and 2No for all other buildings. 
3  3.12.2    ISOLATED  a) All isolated foundations have been designed 
FOUNDATIONS  based on the geotechnical recommendations 
based  on  the  depth of  formation  level.  The 
minimum  foundation  SBC  considered  for 
design is 160kN/m2 
4  3.27      COMPACTION OF FILLING  d)   Compaction  of  fill  shall  be  controlled  and 
carried  out  with  sufficient  passes  of  the 
rollers or compactors to obtain at least 98% 
of  the  maximum  dry  density  at  optimum 
moisture content compared with laboratory 
test  results.  The  Contractor  shall  when 

    2 
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
 
Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement‐KLP 4 & 5    Particular Specifications – Structural 

 
Sr #  Item reference to KLP 6 & 7 Specifications  Specifications for KLP 4 & 5 
directed  by  the  Engineer  carry  out 
compliance field tests to check the degree of 
compaction attained on Site. Only tests that 
meet  the  minimum  compaction 
requirements  of  this  specification  will  be 
paid. The Contractor shall have no claim for 
extra time in connection therewith. 
  4.1.1   GENERAL  c)    It is recommended that Grade slab shall be 
designed  and  executed  under  the 
supervision  of  a  specialist  floor  consultant, 
the  ground  floor  slabs  shall  have  minimum 
design  thickness  of  175  mm  for  buildings 
containing  racking  supported  on  the  grade 
slab and 150mm for other buildings. The slab 
will  be  designed  in  accordance  with  the 
recommendations  of  the  Concrete  Society 
Technical Report 34 (Latest 4th Edition), for 
a maximum uniformly distributed loading as 
mentioned in the drawings. 
    e)   Ground bearing slabs are to be trafficked by 
forklifts  and  should  be  designed  for  the 
following design loading;   
 
Minimum Ground Floor Slab Design Imposed Loading 
Leg Racking  Uniform  Distributed 
Building 
Load (BTB)  Loading  Line Load 
Showrooms  /  80kN  30kN/m2  40kN 
Anchor 
Showrooms 
Warehouse  80kN  30kN/m2  40kN 
LIU Building  80kN  30kN/m2  40kN 
Facility  80kN  30kN/m2  40kN 
Management 
 
Building (FMH) 

    f)      Floor shall be designed as joint less floor in 
  accordance with TR34 and designed so that 
  no vertical movement occurs across the joint 
  but  in  any  case  the  joint  spacing  shall  be 
  minimum  30m.  Joint  location  should  be 
  coordinated  with  the  proposed  racking 
  layout and agreed with the Project Manager 
  and as per the concept drawings. Along the 
  perimeter with the loading/unloading docks 
  a  steel  angle  assembly  or  approved 
  proprietary joint is to be cast into the edge 
of the slab to protect slab edges in trafficked 
areas. 

    3 
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
 
Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement‐KLP 4 & 5    Particular Specifications – Structural 

 
Sr #  Item reference to KLP 6 & 7 Specifications  Specifications for KLP 4 & 5 
    j) 
A  high  standard  of  floor  finish  is  required 
using  power  troweling  techniques.  Floors 
are  to  be  cast  using  the  “laser  screed”  or 
equivalent  approved  system.  No  ripping  or 
power  float  scores  will  be  accepted.  The 
ground  floor  warehouse  &  showroom  slab 
will  be  constructed  so  that  the  surface 
tolerances complies with FM2 and FM4 for 
LIU building as per TR34 (Latest 4th Edition), 
U.N.O in the design drawings. 
6  4.2.  GROUND  BEARING  INTERNAL  NA (not applicable)  ‐ Please refer to the attached 
FLOOR  SLAB  (DISTRIBUTION  specs  for  Grade  Slab  For  Warehouse/ 
WAREHOUSE)  Showroom/ LIU (Annexure 1) 
 
7  6.3.5  ADJUSTMENTS  TO  MIX  COLUMNS & WALLS  Varies, refer to relevant drawings 
PROPORTIONS  ON GROUND SLABS & BEAMS  C40/20‐40N/mm2 Cube strength 
2
INTERNAL  SUSPENDED  SLABS  C40/20‐40N/mm  Cube strength 
& BEAMS 
EXTERNAL  SUSPENDED  SLABS  C40/20‐40N/mm2 Cube strength 
& BEAMS 
 
ALL OTHERS  C40/20‐40N/mm2 Cube strength 

    4 
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
 
 ANNEXURE 1
GRADE SLAB FOR
WAREHOUSE/SHOWROOM/LIU

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

 Grade Slab For Warehouse/Showroom/Liu

4.1 GRADE SLAB FOR WAREHOUSE/SHOWROOM/LIU

The floor slab shall be designed by a floor specialist consultant in accordance with the guidance
given in Concrete Society Technical Report No.34 (TR 34 Fourth Edition, 2013) and the work
shall be carried out by a specialist flooring contractor under the supervision of floor consultant.
The specialist shall submit design calculations and construction drawings for Employer’s
approval. The specialist floor contractor shall demonstrate minimum 10 years of proven
experience in the GCC in the successful design and execution of large panel joint less floor slab
as specified hereunder.

The floor slab shall be constructed as large area laser screed so that the surface regularity
(flatness and levelness) is within the tolerances as defined in TR34- FM2 for warehouse and
show room and FM4 for LIUs. Upon completion a full digital profilograph slab survey shall be
carried out as per TR34 through an approved independent 3rd party agency.

The slab to be joint less with no sawn induced contraction joints (the minimum joint spacing
shall be 30.0m) and designed so as to minimize vertical movement across the joint. Joint layout
shall be coordinated with racking and column layout to maximize the efficiency of the floor.
Slab panels shall be within a length/width ratio of 3:2 where possible to minimize differential
shrinkage cracking. The slab to be isolated from the column bases with 20mm wide isolation
material and no joint shall be within 100mm of the corner of a column. Isolation to the outside
walls and edge beams may be achieved by continuing the slip membrane from under the slab
up the face of the wall or edge beam. Construction joints where possible shall be located away
from areas of high traffic but care will be taken to avoid horizontal movement eventually to be
accommodated by joint opening. Ideally to position the joints underneath racking as close to
the racks as possible. All formed free movement joints (construction joints) subject to traffic by
mechanical handling equipment shall be provided with suitable steel armoured joints fixed
strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and as per the concept structural
drawings layout. Door thresholds, both internal and external, where butting up to a concrete
slab or beam and around the dock must have a load transfer detail incorporated and details of
the same shall be submitted for approval.

1
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
 Grade Slab For Warehouse/Showroom/Liu

The surface of the floor shall have a minimum abrasion resistance of AR1 in accordance with
Table 4 of BS 8204-2, 2002. One abrasion test shall be carried out for each 4,000 sqm of slab or
part thereof, in accordance with BS EN 13892-4-2002 to confirm that appropriate abrasion
resistance has been achieved. Tests shall be carried out by an approved independent agency
not sooner than 2 months after construction.

The floor slab grade of concrete, slab thickness and reinforcement detail shall be as per the
structural drawings and specialist design to achieve minimum joints as shown in the concept
drawing. The slab is to be designed for the most onerous loads as specified in the structural
drawing. The floor loading shall be further coordinated with racking details and reconfirmed
during the specialist design stage.

Prior to concreting the slab, all roof and wall sheeting and loading doors must be fixed to
provide protection from wind and rain. If due to programme restraints this cannot be achieved,
then temporary sheeting must be used to seal all openings. Walls and columns of the building
shall be protected from concrete splashes with 1 meter high plastic sheeting taped to walls.
The ground floor slabs will be constructed on a 1000 gauge(250 microns) polythene damp proof
membrane lapped a minimum 150mm and taped with 100mm wide jointing tape and sealed
around penetrations laid on a layer of compacted(to minimum 98% of MDD) sub base
material(road base) having minimum CBR of 80% with a minimum thickness 250mm. The sub
base shall be well closed at the surface and capable of carrying construction traffic without
significant deformation. The surface tolerance of the sub base will be within +0 mm and -10
mm and average 0 mm. Plate load tests(1 test per 5,000 m2) shall be carried out on the slab
formation by an approved independent agency to verify the K value of surface.

The floor shall be poured in large bays and dry shake topping material at a dosage of up to
4Kg/m2 shall be applied (by a mechanical topping spreader) to the surface after the concrete
has been placed and initially leveled. When the concrete has hardened sufficiently to support
the weight of men and machine, power floating shall be done with several passes until a
smooth, shining finish, free of all noticeable ridges is achieved. After the final power flotation
operation, the floor slabs will be sprayed with an acrylic based, curing, sealing and hardening
agent- BASF Masterkure 181 or approved equivalent. The following morning the floor shall be

2
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
 Grade Slab For Warehouse/Showroom/Liu

first covered in water and one layer of 1000gauge plastic sheeting applied to further enhance
the curing regime. The plastic sheeting is to remain in place for at least 7 days. The surface of
the floor shall be continually wetted for a minimum of 7 days. After application cement spills
shall be removed from adjacent panels and newly poured panels shall be fenced off with red
tape to avoid trespassing for a minimum of 7 days. The floor shall not be trafficked for a
minimum of seven days following the sealing operation and shall not be loaded for 28 days.
Until the Taking over Certificate is issued, the permitted movement shall be as per written
confirmation from the floor specialist consultant.

All efforts shall be made in the construction and detailing of the floor to reduce the possibility
of random cracking. If cracks do occur, they must be grouted with a suitable low viscosity epoxy
resin.

Internal floor markings shall be carried out as per Employer’s requirements.

The specialist flooring consultant/contractor and main contractor will upon completion of the
slab warrant his works for a period of 10 years against defects including but not limited to,
random cracking, damage at movement joint arris, moisture ingress through movement joints,
surface delamination, tolerances within the flatness specification and abrasion resistance. The
floor shall be insured by the specialist including consequential loss for a minimum period of 10
years and proof of insurance shall be submitted to the Employer.

3
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
 MEP

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

 

Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement KLP 4 & 5 

Particular Specifications‐ MEP 

1. Section 22 10 05 Part 02 
2. Section 22 10 05 Part 03 
3. Section 22 10 05 Part 02 
4. Additional Particular Specification sections for KLP 4&5 
 

   

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

 
Critical Warehousing  Capacity Enhancement‐KLP 4 & 5    Particular Specifications –MEP (Rev.01) 

S. No.  Item reference to KLP 6 & 7 specifications  Specifications for KLP 4 & 5 

1  Section 22 10 05 Part 02  Part 02 Products clause iv. Domestic water

piping, above & below grade ‐ All above ground
domestic water supply piping and fittings shall
be multilayered PPR SDR7.4 PN‐16 rated.
All underground water supply pipe material
and fittings shall be HDPE SDR
7.4 – PN 16 pressure rated.
All  pipes  and  fittings  for  domestic  water  supply 
shall be WRAS/SKZ or equal approved. 
2  Section 22 10 05 Part 03  Part 03 Execution clause VIII, Schedules‐ All
above ground piping works exposed to
sunlight shall be complete with
minimum 13mm thick elastomeric
insulation,  canvas  cloth  and  antifungal  weather 
protection coating. 
3  Section 22 10 05 Part 02  Part 02 Products clause I till VI. All plumbing service 
valves,  fittings  and  related  accessories  pressure 
rating shall be suitably rated for working pressure of 
minimum 250 psi or as per the operating pressure 
requirements whichever is higher. 
4  Additional Particular Specification sections for KLP 4&5 
  Annexure ‐ 01  01 0500 MEP General Requirements 
  Annexure ‐ 02  21 1339 Foam Water Sprinkler & Spray Systems 

  Annexure ‐ 03  26 0533 Raceway and Boxes 

  Annexure ‐ 04  26 0583 Equipment Termination 

  Annexure ‐ 05  26 0600 Basic Materials 
  Annexure ‐ 06  26 0800 Electrical Testing 
  Annexure ‐ 07  26 0923 Lighting Control Equipment 
  Annexure ‐ 08  26 2400 Auto Transfer Switch 
  Annexure ‐ 09  26 2816.16 Enclosed Switch 
  Annexure ‐ 10  26 4300 Surge Protection 
  Annexure ‐ 11  26 5100 Lamps and Luminaires 

  Annexure ‐ 12  26 5629 Site Lighting 
 

                 2 
 
  WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001
 ANNEXURE – 01
01 0500 MEP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

CONTENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
1.4 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS
1.5 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
1.7 DRAWINGS, CHANGES AND INSTALLATION
1.8 QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE
1.9 METHOD STATEMENTS
1.10 PROTECTION AND STORAGE
1.11 WARRANTIES
1.12 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON COMPLETION AND COMMISSIONING
1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND TRAINING OF
PERSONNEL
1.14 REGULATIONS
1.15 GOVERNING STANDARDS
1.16 ABBREVIATIONS

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA
2.2 PRODUCTS – GENERAL
2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS
3.2 ACCESS TO EQUIPMETS
3.3 PERMITS FEES AND INSPECTIONS
3.4 TEMPORARY SERVICE
3.5 COOPERATION
3.6 SUPERVISION
3.7 SCHEDULING
3.8 WORK TO CONTINUE
3.9 WORKMANSHIP
3.10 CUTTING & PATCHING
3.11 PAINTING & FINISHING
3.12 EXCAVATION & BACKFILLING
3.13 CONDUITS & SUPPORT
3.14 ACCESS PANELS
3.15 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
3.16 COORDINATION
3.17 SINGULAR NUMBER
3.18 CLEANING
3.19 ACCESSIBILITY
3.20 INSPECTION, TESTING & ADJUSTING
3.21 TEMPORARY USAGE
3.22 INSPECTION OF THE WORK
3.23 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.24 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

3.25 CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION
3.26 WARRANTY
3.27 MAINTENANCE
3.28 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 26
Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

1.1.1 This document describes the general requirements for various MEP services.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Reviewed: Reviewed by the Consultant; normally a design or piece of equipment must be
shown to have operated successfully for not less than two years under conditions
generally similar to those required by this contract. The review of a design or piece of
equipment shall be without prejudice to the acceptance tests required after installation.

1.2.2 Size: When related to pipe work means nominal size, which generally approximates to the
bore of steel and plastic tubes, the outside diameter of copper tubes etc.

1.2.3 “Complete installation” shall mean not only the major items of plant and equipment
conveyed by this specification, but all the incidental sundry components necessary for the
complete execution of the works and for the proper operation of the installation, with
their labour charges, whether or not these sundry components are mentioned in detail in
the tender documents issued in connection with the contract.

1.2.4 "As indicated", "where indicated”, and “unless otherwise indicated", refer to items or
requirements which are, or may be given elsewhere in the tender documents issued in
connection with the contract, (e.g. on a drawing, in a supplementary specification or in a
schedule to this specification).

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

1.3.1 This section of the MEP specifications is common to all MEP work elements and specifies
the general technical requirements for all mechanical, electrical and associated building
services contractors.

1.3.2 The MEP specifications shall be read in conjunction with the Architectural, Structural,
Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical drawings, other relevant specifications and contract
documentation, preliminaries, etc. which are relevant to the specific work element.

1.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the specific mechanical and electrical installations
detailed in the documents and shall meet all the parameters specified and requirements
detailed within the specifications.

1.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for all works detailed in the Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering Specifications and in particular the following items: ‐

 Liaising with statutory bodies including those supplying services to the site

 Ensuring that all equipment provided is ‘type approved’ for the completion of the
installation and, if not, obtaining the necessary approvals in time to suit the
installation.

 Providing builders work fabrication and co‐ordinated drawings for all services and
detailed wiring diagrams for all equipment.

 Inspecting all plant, equipment and materials as delivered or where specified at the
Manufacturer’s works.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

 Fixing or installing correctly all plant, equipment and materials.

 Ensuring all associated works such as electrical wiring, connecting pipe work, builders
work etc., are properly executed and co‐ordinated.

 Testing and commissioning the complete installation, including making adjustments
and balancing as necessary.

 Demonstrating that the equipment is capable of the performance and method of
operation specified to the satisfaction and acceptance of the Engineer.

 Providing samples, where requested, of all materials exposed to view in the finished
works for comment.

 Demonstrating that the overall and completed systems perform correctly in the
required manner and as intended by the Specification to the satisfaction and
acceptance of the Engineer.

 Providing record drawings of the completed installation.

 Providing operating instructions and maintenance manuals for the completed
systems.

 Providing a full set of test results in an approved format for all tests, commissioning
and balancing operations.

 The Contractor shall supply, install and commission and make necessary
arrangements with respective Statutory Undertakings for the completed and working
systems associated with the specified Work Package that he is commissioned to
undertake.

 Training of client’s staff.

1.3.5 Nothing less than the requirements stipulated will be accepted without prior approval by
the Engineer.

1.3.6 Contractor’s Design Responsibility

 Where separate work elements have been identified the Contractor who is appointed
as the general MEP installation Contractor shall be responsible for the co‐ordination
of the complete engineering services’ installation including the coordination and
management of the testing and commissioning, where interfacing is required, for all
mechanical and electrical works element Contractors.

 All works Contractors shall be totally responsible for the design of all support systems
associated with the works which are required to provide a fully functional installation.

 All Contractors shall be responsible for ensuring that the engineering services comply
with all statutory requirements, together with the requirements of all mechanical and
electrical engineering specifications.

 The Contractor shall be deemed to have included within his tender submission for all
services to move by up to 3 meters in any direction prior to installation at no extra
cost to the contract.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

 The coordinating Contractor shall ensure that he has adequately co‐ordinated and
liaised with all individual work element Contractors and shall ensure that he has
included for all items necessary to provide a fully complete installation. Any additional
costs resulting from failure to comply with this clause shall be borne by the
coordinating Contractor.

 Particular care shall be taken to obtain uniform and tidy arrangements of wall and
ceiling mounted equipment. The precise position of a piece of equipment shall be
determined as follows:

 Single items of equipment, which are visually remote from other electrical or
mechanical equipment, shall be erected at the mounting heights stated in the
Specification or on the drawings.

 Two or more items of equipment whether electrical or mechanical or both, which are
to be erected on the same wall or ceiling, or which will be otherwise visually close to
each other, shall be arranged in a neat and symmetrical group. Symmetry of
arrangement shall be obtained by horizontal and vertical alignment through the
centre lines and not the edges of the equipment and for this purpose the mounting
heights stated in the Specification or on the drawings may be varied slightly.

 The proposed arrangements showing the outlines of all the electrical and mechanical
equipment in each group shall be marked on the wall and the approval of the Architect
or his representative obtained before any holes or chases are cut out.

 The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design of Hydraulic Fire
Extinguishing System in accordance with CDA requirements.

1.3.7 Responsibility for Plant and Equipment

 The Contractor shall ensure that the suppliers are provided with all performance
data, specification and standards, necessary for the provision of equipment but able
for the specified duty and purpose.

 Where plant and equipment is pre‐tendered the Contractor shall ensure that his
tender complies with all relevant technical information contained in the specification
irrespective of any pre‐tender information suppliers provided to the Engineer.

 The Contractor shall give supervision, inspection, and testing reports during
manufacture or fabrication at works or on site, as and when required; and is to
ensure that delivery, assembly and completion of the order and amendments or
modifications thereto comply with the programme.

1.3.8 Design Intent

 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the ‘Design Intent’ indicated on
the Contract Drawings is in no way impaired due to additional bends, deviations or
changes in the service routes and plant layout.

1.3.9 Calculations

 This Contractor shall provide detailed calculations for flow and head requirements
for all AHU's, fans, and pumps. These calculations shall be done prior to ordering the
equipment and shall be submitted to the Engineers for review prior to ordering such
equipment. This Contractor shall bear full responsibility for the final equipment
sizing and selection.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 26
Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

 The calculations shall be issued to the Engineer for comment.

 The Contractor shall readily make available to the Engineer any such calculations
requested by him.

 Inspection or approval of any of the Contractor's calculations, whether verbally or in

writing shall in no way alleviate the Contractor's responsibility or obligations in
ensuring the correct performance and safety aspects of the mechanical and services
installation. It shall not be deemed to affect the Contractor/Client design warranty.

 Calculations shall be clearly and concisely set out and shall be sub‐headed to identify
the exact section of the works to which they refer.

1.3.10 The MEP engineering services must comply fully with the relevant Standards, Code of
Practices and Local Bylaws applicable to the location of the site but, in any event, where
no local standard exists, the Contractor shall comply fully with the relevant Standard or
Code of Practice and Mechanical and Electrical Standards detailed within the
specifications provided for the specified work element.

1.3.11 The MEP Specifications and drawings are issued to indicate agreed principles of the
system design, design criteria and client’s requirements. They do not attempt to detail
every system component and it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that he
has included within his costs for all items necessary to meet the requirements of the
Specifications, engineering design intent and Employer’s requirements.

1.3.12 The Works shall be complete in every respect and the Contractor shall include for all
items, though some may not be particularly specified, to ensure that the work shall be
complete in every detail for the sum stated in the Tender.

1.3.13 No claims for extras shall be considered unless specific instructions have been issued in
writing by the Employer’s Agent to execute works additional to the Contract.

1.3.14 The Bye‐Laws and Regulations of the Local Authority shall be complied with and the
Contractor, when submitting his priced Tender shall draw attention to any requirements
indicated in the Preamble and Drawings which are not in accordance with such Bye‐Laws
and Regulations.

1.3.15 The prices throughout the Schedule are to include for all jointing compounds, hold fasts,
nails and screws for all carriage, workmanship and all other expenses necessary to
complete the work of MEP Division as further specified and as shown on the Drawings.

1.3.16 The manufacture, supply, delivery, erection, testing and adjustment of the complete air
conditioning, ventilation, plumbing, drainage and fire protection systems.

1.3.17 All of the material to provide a complete and operational installation to the satisfaction of
the Consultant. All incidental component and appurtenance necessary for the proper
operation of the system shall be provided and installed as required with the approval of
Consultant whether or not they were specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents

1.4 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIROMENT REQUIREMENTS

1.4.1 The Contractor and all persons (including sub‐Contractors) employed by the Contractor
on the work, shall comply with all health, safety and environmental legislation, codes of
practice/guidance from the UK Health & Safety Executive which ever or the must onerous
and with the provisions of any regulation, standards or working roles of any industry
associated with the contract works.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 6 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.4.2 The Contractor shall include for all necessary materials, goods, work and attendance
required to ensure that safe methods of working are followed when using any equipment
or materials which may involve danger to life or property.

1.4.3 The Contractor shall particularly safeguard and take all necessary precautions against
damage by fire or explosion where the execution of the work may involve the presence of
flame or sparks.

1.4.4 Petroleum products and other inflammable or vaporizing liquids, gases or solids shall only
be used in accordance with the regulations applicable to storage and use of these
products. When equipment and vessels containing these items are not in use they shall be
removed, together with their contents, to a safe place of storage.

1.4.5 The Contractor shall be responsible, and shall make due allowance, for giving all notices
and attendance for inspection to the Utility Service Providers and the Local and Public
Authorities. These requirements include obtaining all necessary consents and paying all
fees legally demandable.

1.4.6 The Contractor shall be satisfied and confirm that the whole of the installation is in
accordance with the Bye‐Laws, Building Regulations, Building Control and regulations of
the Local Council, the requirements of the Public Health Officer, the Regional Electricity
Company / Network owner / Manager, the Fire Brigade and all interested parties.

1.4.7 In the event of there being discrepancies between the Standards, Regulations etc., or
between this Specification and the Standards, Regulations, etc., the most stringent shall be
deemed to apply.

1.4.8 Authorities shall be notified as necessary about the connection of electricity.

1.4.9 In the event of items requiring prefabrication and erection on site, the B.S. tests or local
EU tests will be carried out in‐situ.

1.5 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

1.5.1 The drawings for services works are performance drawings, diagrammatic, and intended
to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate locations
of apparatus, fixtures, pipe and duct runs, etc. The drawings do not intend to indicate
architectural or structural details, nor do they show any fabrication or installation details.

1.5.2 Do not scale drawings. Obtain accurate dimensions to structure and architectural items
from drawings of those trades. Confirm by site measurement. Verify location and
elevation of all services (Water, Electrical, Telephone, Sanitary, Storm Drainage, etc.,)
before proceeding with the work.

1.5.3 Make at no extra cost, any changes or additions to materials, and/ or equipment necessary
to accommodate structural conditions (pipes or ducts around beams, columns, etc.)

1.5.4 Alter, at no additional cost, the location of materials and/ or equipment as directed,
provided that the changes are made before installation and do not necessitate additional
material.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

1.6.1 The Contractor shall allow for all necessary CAD resources for the production of drawings

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 7 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

and make due allowance in the programme to revise the drawing as necessary to take
account of the design development.

1.6.2 The Contractor is advised that all drawings produced in electronic format shall be in
accordance with the project CAD standards.

1.6.3 The Contractor is responsible for producing all the following drawings:

 Co‐ordination and manufacturer’s drawings.
 Builders work information drawings.
 Installation drawings.
 Shop drawings.
 Record drawing.

1.6.4 Present a schedule of shop drawings after award of the contract and not later than what is
specified in the contract documents, indicating the anticipated date when the drawings
will be submitted for review. Assume full responsibility for timely submission of all
drawings.

1.6.5 The Contractor shall maintain on site a full set of up to date drawings that can be viewed
by the Engineer or Main Contractor at any time. These drawings shall be updated in line
with all amendments issued by the Employer's Agent within 10 working days.

1.6.6 Drawings production and presentation is a Contractual matter and any delay on the
Contractor's behalf in making these submissions will be considered a Contractual delay
and may be subject to Contractual penalties and other remedies as determined by the
Consultant.

1.6.7 The Consultant will only consider shop drawings bearing the stamp of the Contractor
involved. Check for all pertinent information such as physical dimensions, make,
performance, electrical characteristics and indicate the intended use and location before
submitting these drawings. Use reference symbols or enumeration to correspond to the
contract drawings.

1.6.8 Assume responsibility for accuracy of equipment dimensions related to space available,
accessibility for maintenance and service, compliance with inspection authority’s codes.
Ensure that shop drawings indicate the shipping and working weights of all equipment.

1.6.9 Submit shop drawings and samples for all materials and equipment. Provide
transparencies wherever possible and provide printed copies in a number as specified
elsewhere in the contract documents.

1.6.10 The submission of samples will be subject to the same procedure as that of shop drawings.
One set of such samples shall be required to be brought to site and kept there after
approval till substantial completion.

1.6.11 The Contractor will be responsible for producing all working drawings and shall obtain
from his suppliers, detailed arrangement working drawings, builders work drawings, etc.
supplied within the time stated in the Contract Documents. Such drawings are to be
submitted to the Engineer in duplicate for comment before delivery or erection of the
section or plant commences. The final details, including all technical aspects and
calculations where applicable shall be submitted in a clear, definable and easily read
format with the specified technical details, notes and performance data clearly shown.

1.6.12 Where plant or equipment is to be installed within or adjacent to any building or

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 8 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

structure, the Contractor shall take his own dimensions of the building or structure for the
purpose of installing any plant and materials which are being supplied and fixed under
this contract and shall be responsible for the accuracy of such dimensions. These
dimensions shall be used in preference to any noted on the drawings.

1.6.13 All dimensions shown on the drawings shall be checked and verified by the Contractor
prior to commencing installation.

1.6.14 All drawings shall be read in conjunction with the Architectural and Structural drawings,
and it shall be the Contractors responsibility to ensure that work is being carried out in
accordance with the latest issue of the relevant architects, structural and engineers’
drawings.

1.6.15 Prepare drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and openings
for all passages through structure and all insert sizes and locations.

1.6.16 The Contractor must make every provision for installing the works specified herein to
meet the building conditions to provide for every contingency in connection therein.

1.6.17 Prepare composite construction drawings, fully dimensioned, of piping and equipment in
tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms and areas, and all other critical locations to
avoid a conflict of trades.

1.6.18 Base equipment drawings upon shop drawings and include but do not necessarily limit to,
all details pertaining to access, cleanouts, tappings, sleeves, electrical connections, drains,
location and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from consultation with, and
agreement of, all trades involved.

1.6.19 Prepare drawings of equipment bases pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof
curbs, wall openings, trenches, pertaining to mechanical work.

1.6.20 The Contractor is to prepare and submit for approval of the Engineer all detailed drawings
of the scheme, plant and any other details necessary for the instruction of their workmen.
Should the Contractor fail to comply with the requirements of this clause, they shall be
responsible for any works of rectification including associated builders work, mechanical
or electrical work etc., at their own cost if instructed by the Engineer.

1.6.21 Furnish prints of the reviewed details to all other parties who may require them for
proper coordination of their work, and furnish all information necessary for the work as a
whole.

1.6.22 The Contractor should note that the Engineers’ drawings are prepared to indicate the
Design intent for the relevant services and should not adopt these as working drawings. It
is the Contractors responsibility to produce his own working drawings. These drawings
must be submitted for comment prior to commencement of work and must include the
services as depicted on the Engineers’ design Intent drawings. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the production of all site co‐ordination drawings incorporating all
mechanical and electrical services and such drawings will be submitted for comment as
noted previously. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out any
alterations to his working drawings due to revisions to the structural layout. Alterations
to the Services’ Installations will be forwarded to the Contractor in sketch or drawing
form and it will be the Contractors responsibilities to update his drawings and issue
revised drawings to the Engineer one week from receipt of the Engineers’ revised
drawings.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 9 of 26
Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.6.23 Contractors working drawings shall be produced for all services described inclusive of,
but not restricted to, the following: ‐

 Ductwork manufacturer drawings.
 Specialist Automatic Controls Schematic and Wiring Diagrams.
 Working drawings of pipe work general arrangement along with Plant Room
layouts for boiler house, ventilation plant rooms, etc. Pipe work drawings to be
1:50 scale and plant room details 1:20 scale.
 Working drawings of all electrical installations along with plant room details,
General electrical drawings to be 1:50 scale and plant room drawings 1:20
scale.
 Schematic drawings.
 Builders work drawings including details of plinths, bases, brackets, wall and
floor openings, roof openings, including fan curbs and trimmer requirements.
 Details of access requirements throughout, suitable for testing, commissioning
and maintenance.
 Relevant openings required in suspended ceilings, together with access
requirements suitable for testing, commissioning and maintenance.
 Schedule of electrical requirements listing manufacturer specific data
associated with all electrical plant and equipment being provided by the
Contractor.
 Air handling unit manufacturers dimensioned arrangement drawings.
 Cold water storage tank drawings.
 All packaged equipment certified drawings including fan coil units etc.

1.6.24 The Schematic and general Arrangement Drawings shall be prepared to describe in a basic
manner the design of the Mechanical Engineering systems, the working principles of the
systems and the intended methods of installation together with sizes and capacities and
rating of all components. They shall be sufficient to enable all parties to appreciate the
inter‐relation of the Mechanical Works to the Main Works as a whole.

1.6.25 Composite circuit and layout diagrams for electrical services shall detail not only all
circuitry within main control panels but also connection diagrams for all external
equipment such as starters, all forms of control devices for ventilation equipment, etc,
together with all interconnecting wiring from the main point of supply onwards and all
termination markings. All circuit and layout diagrams shall include explanatory notes and
shall show the required sizes and type of all cables with the rating of such items on fuses,
switches, etc.

1.6.26 Individual circuit and layout drawings from the various component manufacturers will
not be accepted in lieu of composite diagrams.

1.6.27 The drawings will be checked to ensure that they do not contradict the Design Intent and
comment by the Engineer will be so limited.

1.6.28 The approved designation A or B used by the Engineer shall mean that the Contractors
drawings and details conform to the Design Intent. The Contractor shall be responsible
for dimensioning, setting out, detailed co‐ordination of the services within the scope of his
Contract. Should the details shown on the Contractors drawings necessitate a variation in
cost, then this must be advised to the Engineer when the initial submission is made for
comment.

1.6.29 Without such notice, the Engineer's comment will not constitute any variation in cost to
the Contract.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 10 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.6.30 The Contractor shall be responsible for any omission, errors or any discrepancies in the
drawings and other particulars supplied by him or his suppliers, whether or not such
drawings or particulars have been commented upon by the Engineer. This responsibility
shall hold unless such omission, errors or discrepancies are due to inaccurate information
of particulars furnished in writing to the Contractor by the Engineer.

1.6.31 The Consultant’s review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations
from the Contract documents, unless he has, in writing, called the Consultant’s attention to
such deviations at the time of submission of drawings. The Consultant’s review shall be
construed to apply to, and only to, general arrangements and shall not relieve the
Contractor from the entire responsibility. Any approval by the Consultant shall be on the
understanding that any item submitted shall be ordered with options and modifications to
fully met the specification. Any fabrication, erection, setting out or other work done in
advance of receipt of stamped drawings shall be done entirely at the Contractor's risk and
cost.

1.6.32 Drawings shall be of the BS international ‘A’ series and every drawing shall have the name
of the contact as shown on the cover of the specification. Drawings shall be cross
referenced for ease of interpretation.

1.6.33 Builder's work drawings shall show fully dimensioned, all foundations, bases plinths,
sumps, holes and sleeves details required and the overall size and weights of the plant
concerned.

1.6.34 With the agreement of the Engineer, smaller holes, built‐in fixings, etc., other than in plant
rooms, may be marked out on site instead of on drawings.

1.6.35 Fully dimensioned plant room drawings shall detail for each plant room the location of
each unit, pipe routes and connections with valves and fittings, duct routes and
connection with accessories, drain connections, electrical connections and controls. All
drawings shall include explanatory notes and shall show the required sizes of pipes and
ducts with and without insulation as applicable.

1.6.36 If abbreviations are employed for the designation of components, an integral schedule
shall be provided on the drawings to explain the meanings of the abbreviations.

1.6.37 Individual equipment drawings from the various manufacturers will not be accepted in
lieu of these composite plant room drawings.

1.7 DRAWINGS, CHANGES AND INSTALLATION

1.7.1 The drawings shall be considered to show the general character and scope of the work
and not the exact details of the installation. The installation shall be complete with all
accessories required for a complete and operative installation.

1.7.2 The location, arrangement and connection of equipment and material as shown on the
drawings represent a close approximation to the intent and requirements of the Contract.
The right is reserved by the Engineer to make reasonable changes required to
accommodate conditions arising during the progress of the work, at no extra cost to the
Contract.

1.7.3 All piping and duct work in finished areas shall be concealed in ceiling spaces and shafts
or chased into walls. No exposed piping or duct work shall be installed in such areas
unless specifically accepted by the Engineer and previously indicated on approved
working drawings.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 11 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.7.4 Vent pipes, exhaust hoods or other mechanical equipment mounted on roof, or housing
for such equipment, shall not be closer to the edge of roof than a distance equal to the
height of the pipe, hood or equipment; unless specifically accepted by the Engineer and
previously indicated on approved working drawings.

1.7.5 The actual location of thermostats, switches, etc., shall be reviewed by the Engineer before
installation.

1.7.6 The location and size of existing services shown on the drawings are based on the best
available information. The actual location of existing services shall be verified in the field
before work is commenced.

1.7.7 Changes and modifications necessary to ensure coordination and to avoid interference
and conflicts with other trades, or to accommodate existing conditions, shall be made at
no extra cost to the Contract.

1.7.8 The Contractor shall ensure that all plant to be supplied by him can be installed in the
available space and that there is adequate access to admit all plant to its position and
enable maintenance to be carried out on the plant without difficulty.

1.7.9 Special care shall be taken in areas where pour‐gaps take place. Coordinate the work
schedule with the Contractor.

1.7.10 The Contractor shall carefully and thoroughly examine the drawings, specification and all
other documentation provided, and fully acquaint himself with the work to be done, as no
allowance for claims will be considered for any alleged deficiency of work or materials. If
any work or materials obviously necessary to complete the Works have been omitted to
be defined in the Specification, such work or materials shall be provided without any
additional payment.

1.7.11 The Contractor shall take his own dimensions for both the preparation of his tender and
for the execution of the work, and he alone shall be responsible for the accuracy of such
dimensions and of drawings made there from. All dimensions specially marked on the
drawings shall be rigorously adhered to.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE

1.8.1 All materials used on the project shall be brand new and of high quality. Obtain approval
of all manufacturers from the Consultant and the Owner.

1.8.2 "New" is defined as newly manufactured, "state of the art," tested and proven item of
equipment. Items which have been held in stock for any extended period of time by either
the Manufacturer or the Supplier will be rejected.

1.8.3 All materials used on this project shall bear the third party quality assurance stamp like
British Standard kitemark, UL, FM, LPC and/or other quality assurance authority as stated
therein elsewhere.

1.8.4 All materials shall conform to the requirements of the specified British Standards or to
other equipment North American, DIN or European Standards.

1.9 METHOD STATEMENTS

1.9.1 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with full and detailed method statements for
the installation, pre commissioning, setting to work, commissioning, testing and handover

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 12 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

procedures to be applied to the whole of the works.

1.9.2 Where specialists are required to undertake the works, the Contractor shall obtain similar
documents from them and incorporate them into the Works Method Statement.

1.9.3 Include within the method statement, the following:

1. Logic diagram of the process flow

2. Outline programme, detailed programme(s) to be added as the document develops

3. Copies of all check lists, record sheets, etc. proposed for use. Ensure all are clearly
specific to the project and complete with design information and schematic drawings

4. Permit to work systems and documentation

5. Details of works by others on which the Contractor depends on being complete and
at what time to maintain programme progress

6. Proposed off site testing

7. Proposed completion of work in zones

8. Proposals for quality control of the work prior to offering to the Client’s Agent.

9. Handover, demonstration and training

1.9.4 The Contractor shall submit the method statement for testing, commissioning and
handover within one month of the contract award and shall regularly update thereafter to
incorporate the Engineers comments and/or ongoing developments.

1.9.5 The Engineer reserves the right to request additional method statements from the
Contractor for any other aspect of the works, at his discretion at no additional cost.

1.10 PROTECTION AND STORAGE

1.10.1 Protect the buildings and structures from damage due to carrying out of this work.


1.10.2 Protect the buildings and structures from damage due to carrying out of this work.

1.10.3 Protect all mechanical & electrical works from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean
at all times.

1.10.4 Cover all openings in equipment and materials. Cover all temporary openings in ducts and
pipes with polyethylene sheets or caps until final connection is made. The quality of such
cover must be determined with due regard to how long it may be until final connection.

1.10.5 Be responsible for and make good any damages caused directly or indirectly to any walls,
floors, ceilings, woodwork, brickwork, finishes, services, roads, gardens, etc.

1.11 WARRANTIES

1.11.1 All apparatus shall be built and installed so as to deliver its full rated capacity at the
efficiency for which it was designed.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 13 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.11.2 The entire mechanical and electrical apparatus shall operate at full capacity without
objectionable noise or vibration.

1.11.3 The mechanical systems shall provide the performance required at standard operating
conditions.

1.11.4 Where a manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern.

1.12 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON COMPLETION AND COMMISSIONING

1.12.1 A copy of the tests and commissioning report of the equipment/system shall be bound
into the O&M Manual.

1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND TRAINING OF PERSONNEL

1.13.1 Conform to the requirements of Client in addition to those of this section.

1.13.2 To ensure that the building users staff retain a permanent record of the installation, the
Contract shall include for editing, printing, binding and producing operation and
maintenance manuals to the approval of the Engineer.

1.13.3 Prior to printing, three draft copies of each booklet shall be submitted for the Engineers
approval, one month prior to the Contract completion. The Engineer reserves the right to
modify the draft copies prior to printing without incurring additional cost to the tender
price.

1.13.4 The manuals should be written in such a manner to convey precise information to enable
that individual installation to be satisfactorily operated and maintained by trained
personnel. Completed manuals shall be of a standard and finish equal to this specification
with durable binders and properly printed covers. The manuals shall have a
comprehensive index and be compiled into sections in ring binders for each system of the
installation, i.e. Fire Protection, HVAC etc. and include the following:‐

a) Familiarise and description section outlining overall philosophy of project/system.

b) Method of operation, including procedures to initiate emergency shutdown and
re‐start the system

c) Maintenance schedules broken down into periodic routines i.e. daily, weekly, monthly
etc.

d) Fault finding, routines and emergency procedures (including telephone numbers).

e) Manufacturer’s catalogues as relevant to this installation, general catalogues not
acceptable.

f) List of relevant as installed drawings.

g) Reduced scale schematics and wiring diagrams.

h) Manufacturer’s drawings.

i) Schedules of equipment.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 14 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

j) Manufacturers test certificates and warranties.

k) Manufacturers recommended spare parts, together with manufacturer/ supplier,

reference numbers and contact address/telephone number.

l) Commissioning test results.

1.13.5 The manual should contain all necessary warnings to ensure the health and safety of the
general public together with operating and maintenance staff.

1.13.6 The services of a factory trained, field service representative shall be provided to
supervise the final testing, charging, initial start‐up and conduct concurrent operator
instruction where applicable.

1.13.7 Training Upon completion and acceptance of Installation, properly acquaint

Representative of the Client with details and sufficient training to enable them to obtain
maximum efficiency in the system operation.

1.14 REGULATIONS

1.14.1 The Work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with all rules, regulations, By‐Laws
and requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.

1.14.2 Drawings and specifications should not conflict with the above regulations but where
there are apparent discrepancies the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing and
obtain clarification before proceeding with the Work.

1.15 GOVERNING STANDARDS

1.15.1 The installation shall comply with all relevant statutory instruments and regulations and
in particular with the following:

ARI : American Refrigeration Institute

ASHRAE : American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and

Air Conditioning Engineers Inc.

ASTM : American Society of Testing Materials

SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors National Association.

CIBSE : Chartered Institution of Building Services

Engineers.

NFPA : National Fire Protection Association.

UL : Under writers Laboratory.

BS : British Standards Institution

EN : Euronorms

IEE : Institution of Electrical Engineers.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 15 of 26
Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

IEC : International Electro ‐Technical Commission.

ISO : International Organization of Standardization.

ADCD : Abu Dubai Civil Defense Authority.

AWWA : American Water works Association

ASPE : American Society of Plumbing Engineers.

‐‐ : The Institute of Plumbing, UK

: All Local Authority Regulations and Guidelines

: UAE FLS Code

1.15.2 The tender shall be based on regulations and standards current on the date of return of
tenders. If these regulations are amended or new regulations are enacted after that date,
the Consultant shall be notified immediately.

1.15.3 The materials, equipment and installations detailed in this specification are based on the
standards and codes of practice indicated in the Contract Documents. In the event of a
contradiction between this specification and any applicable Standard or Code of Practice,
the more stringent shall apply. Such conflict must be advised to Consultant in writing for
approval.

1.15.4 Where material and equipment are specified under a particular standard and supplied
under an equivalent standard, a certificate of compliance shall be provided to the
Consultant.

1.16 ABBREVIATIONS

1.16.1 Generally, the following abbreviations are used in this Division

AM.CA Air Moving and Conditioning Assoc. Inc.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWWA American Water Works Association
BS British Standard
Btu/hr British thermal units per hour
B.W.G. British Wire Gauge
cfm cubic feet per minute
DB Dry Bulb
Db Decibel
EEMAC The Electrical and Electronics Manufacturers' Association of
Canada
hp motor horsepower
Kg kilogram
Kpa Kilopascals
L/s Liter per second
NC Noise criterion as defined by graph in A.S.H.R.A.E.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 16 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NPSH Net Positive Suction Head
Pa Pascals
PPM Parts per million
RPM Revolutions per minute
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
SS Stainless steel
UL Underwriters' Laboratories
ULC Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada
W Watts
WB Wet bulb
w.g. Water gauge

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

2.1.1 Contractor shall be responsible that all systems be in compliance with the design criteria
specified hereafter and in separate Sections of the Specifications.

2.2 PRODUCTS ‐ GENERAL

Products and materials for MEP works shall be as described in the pertinent sections of
Divisions of specifications.

2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Wherever possible, all materials and equipment used for similar service shall be of the
same manufacturer. Use products which conform to NFPA codes, possessing a flame
spread rating of not over25 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 50.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS

3.1.1 Visit the site of the proposed works and obtain all information as to existing conditions
and limitations and all proposed works on adjacent sites and in adjacent areas which
might affect the works on this site, whether by Private Individuals or by Government
Authorities or others.

3.1.2 Examine the documents including the Specifications and Drawings of all other Divisions
before bidding and again before commencing any portion of the works.

3.1.3 Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for any claim for extra work or
expense resulting from the failure of the Contractor to be fully aware of Site Conditions,
Drawing implications, etc.

3.2 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENTS

3.2.1 All MEP equipment supplied and installed shall be located to provide easy access for
operation, repair and maintenance. If the devices requiring regular or periodic
maintenance access are concealed above false ceiling or closed shafts, access doors shall
be provided in coordination with the architectural and structural details at no additional
cost.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 17 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.3 PERMITS FEES AND INSPECTIONS

3.3.1 Arrange for inspection of all work by the Authorities having jurisdiction over the works.
This is to occur on an on‐going basis throughout construction to avoid delays at the
termination of the project. On completion of the work present to the Owner, final
unconditional approval certificates of the Inspecting Authorities.

3.3.2 Comply with any changes requested by the Authorities, but notify the Consultant
immediately of any such change for proper processing of these requirements. The
Contractor, working on a regular basis with the Authorities is expected to know which
changes are likely at the time he bids the job, and no extra cost will be allowed for such
changes.

3.4 TEMPORARY SERVICE

3.4.1 Do not use any of the permanent service facilities during construction, unless specific
written approval is obtained from the Consultant and the Owner or where specifically
allowed elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

3.4.2 The use of permanent facilities for temporary services will not affect, in any way, the
commencement day of the period in which the correction after completion is the
Contractor's responsibility. Such period will commence only when the overall project is
completed and certificates of acceptance are issued.

3.4.3 In the event that mains power is not available or is not of sufficient capacity during
construction, supply, install and operate diesel generator(s) of the correct capacity. Any
generator must have full safety features and must be maintained regularly to ensure site
power at all times.

3.5 COOPERATION

3.5.1 Confer with all trades installing equipment which may affect the work of this division, and
arrange equipment in proper relation with that equipment installed under all Divisions of
the Contract.

3.5.2 Furnish all items to be built in by others, in time, complete with all pertinent information,
commensurate with the progress of the work.

3.5.3 Store materials neatly and out of the way and clean up all refuse caused by the work daily.

3.6 SUPERVISION

3.6.1 The contractor will maintain at site, as necessary for the performance of the Contract,
qualified personnel and supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting, testing, and
adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.

3.6.2 Before commencing work the Contractor will submit details of the proposed Engineers
and Supervisors, including copies of their Certificates. If in the Consultant's opinion the
proposed Engineers or Supervisors are not adequately qualified or are otherwise
unacceptable, the onus is on the Contractor to submit alternates until such approval is
given.

3.6.3 Where the Contractor's staff is, or becomes during the Contract deficient in the choice of
adequate or acceptable personnel, the Contractor is to remedy the situation by
appropriate measures.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 18 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.6.4 Approval of the Contractor's Engineers or Staff shall in no way prevent the withdrawal of
that approval at any time during the Contract should the Consultant so desire. In the event
of such disapproval then the Contractor will be required to rectify the position as stated
above within 14 days.

3.6.5 In the event of any negligent or severely detrimental behavior the Consultant has the right
to order the removal from site of any Engineer, Supervisor, or worker on a “forthwith"
basis.

The Contractor will remedy the situation on a similar forthwith basis and in any event will
not be allowed to proceed with any area of work which as a result is left without proper
supervision or technical backup until such time as the Consultant is again satisfied by the
measures taken.

3.6.6 Each Contractor shall attend site meetings as required and prior to the meetings, shall
provide a detailed technical report for each site meeting which shall include the following:

 Works progress/programme
 Procurement items
 Resourceable schedule
 Technical issues
 Any other issues

3.7 SCHEDULING

3.7.1 In the event that a completion dates has been set before tendering it will be the obligation
of the Contractor to provide a schedule adequate for all trades to meet the completion
date.

3.8 WORK TO CONTINUE

3.8.1 Unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Consultant the works are to continue to
completion in the most expeditious manner.

3.9 WORKMANSHIP

3.9.1 Install equipment, ductwork, conduit and piping in a workmanlike manner to present a
neat appearance and to function properly to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Install
ducts and pipes parallel and perpendicular to the building planes. Install all piping and
ductwork concealed in chases, behind furring, or above ceiling, except in unfinished areas.
Install all exposed systems neatly and group to present a neat appearance.

3.9.2 Install all gauges, thermometers, etc., to permit easy observance.

3.9.3 Install all equipment and apparatus which requires maintenance, adjustment, or eventual
replacement with due allowance for this.

3.9.4 Install control valves to guarantee proper sensing. Shield elements from direct radiation
and avoid placing them behind obstructions.
3.9.5 Install all panels and boards, etc., to permit easy operation.

3.9.6 Include in the work all requirements of Manufacturers as shown on their drawings.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 19 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.9.7 Replace all work unsatisfactory to the Consultant without extra cost and to the standard
required by the Consultant. This applies to any item which is found to be defective in
service during the maintenance period, or extended maintenance period as appropriate.

3.9.8 Where height dimensions are given, the installation shall be reasonably expected to be
within 3mm of the design dimensions. Where room center or proportion dimensions are
not shown these shall be reasonably expected to be located on site to within 13mm of
actual position.

3.9.9 Items displaying a horizontal dimension or edge must be plumbed with a level, and must
be to the Consultant's satisfaction. Any apparent discrepancy between "level" electrical
items and adjacent items must be reported immediately to the Consultant.

3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING

3.10.1 The MEP Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and patching of holes in building
construction which are required for the passage of electrical work. Cutting of structural
framing, walls, floors, decks and other members intended to withstand stress is not
permitted.

3.11 PAINTING AND FINISHING

3.11.1 Painting of electrical work exposed in occupied spaces, except mechanical and electrical
machine rooms and maintenance/service spaces; and work exposed on the exterior of the
facility is specified and performed under other divisions of these specifications.

3.11.2 Factory finishes, shop priming, and special protective coatings are specified in the
individual equipment specification sections.

3.11.3 Where factory finishes are provided on equipment and no additional field painting is
specified, all marred or damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished so as to leave
a smooth, uniform finish at the time of final inspection.

3.12 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

3.12.1 Contractor shall perform all excavation and backfilling necessary to install the required
MEP work. Coordinate the work with other excavating and backfilling work in the same
area.

3.12.2 Landscape work, pavement, flooring and similar exposed finish work that is disturbed or
damaged by excavation shall be repaired and restored to their original condition by the
Contractor.

3.13 CONDUITS AND SUPPORT

3.13.1 MEP services, conduits, except electrical conduits run in floor construction, shall be run
parallel with or perpendicular to lines of the building unless otherwise noted on the
drawings. MEP services shall not be hung on hangers with any other service, unless
specifically approved by the Engineer. Electrical conduits shall be hung above all other
service pipes. Hangers on different service lines running close to and parallel with each
other shall be in line with each other and parallel with, or perpendicular to, the lines of the
building. Exact location of electric outlets, piping, ducts, and the like shall be coordinated
to avoid interferences between lighting fixtures, piping, ducts, and similar items.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 20 of 26
Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.14 ACCESS PANELS

3.14.1 MEP services, conduits, except electrical conduits run in floor construction, shall be run
parallel with or perpendicular to lines of the building unless otherwise noted on the
drawings. MEP services shall not be hung on hangers with any other service, unless
specifically approved by the Engineer. Electrical conduits shall be hung above all other
service pipes. Hangers on different service lines running close to and parallel with each
other shall be in line with each other and parallel with, or perpendicular to, the lines of the
building. Exact location of electric outlets, piping, ducts, and the like shall be coordinated
to avoid interferences between lighting fixtures, piping, ducts, and similar items.

3.14.2 Furnish and install panels for access to MEP equipment, junction boxes and similar items
where no other means of access, such as a readily removable, sectional ceiling is shown or
specified.

3.14.3 Panels shall not be less than 12‐inches by 16‐inches in size. Larger panels shall be
furnished where required. Panels in tile or other similar patterned ceilings shall have
dimensions corresponding to the tile or pattern module.

3.14.4 Access panels shall be flush type and of all steel construction, with a No. 16 gauge wall or
ceiling frame for masonry or plaster and a No. 14 gauge panel door. Doors shall be
secured with concealed hinges and flush locks of either the cylinder type or approved,
positive acting, screwdriver operated type. Doors for wall panels may be secured with
suitable clips and countersunk screws. Panels shall be painted with a rust‐inhibitive
primer at the factory. Panels in rated wall shall also be rated.

3.15 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

3.15.1 Install and connect all appliances and equipment as specified and indicated for this
project, in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and recommendations.
Furnish and install complete electric connections and devices as recommended by the
manufacturer or required for proper operation.

3.16 COORDINATION

3.16.1 Coordinate the electrical work with work of the different trades so that:

1. Interferences between mechanical, electrical, architectural, and structural work,

including existing services, will be avoided.
2. Within the limits indicated on the drawings, the maximum practicable space for
operation, repair, removal and testing of electrical and other equipment will be
provided.
3. Pipe, conduits, ducts, and similar items, shall be kept as close as possible to ceiling,
walls, and columns, to take up a minimum amount of space. Pipes, conduits, ducts,
and similar items shall be located so that they will not interfere with the intended use
of other equipment.

3.16.2 Furnish and install, without additional expense to the Owner, all offsets, fittings and
similar items necessary in order to accomplish the requirements of coordination.

3.16.3 Before any sleeves or inserts are set, or any electrical equipment or foundations are
installed, prepare and submit for approval composite coordination drawings for all
equipment rooms, and other areas in which work of two or more trades or subcontractors
is to be installed and in which the probability of interference exists. Drawings shall show

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 21 of 26
Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

the work of all trades covered, shall be drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/2" = 1'‐0", and
shall show clearly in both plan and elevation that all work can be installed without
interference.

3.16.4 Any work installed prior to approval of coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's
risk. Subsequent relocations required to avoid interference’s shall be made without
additional expense to the Owner.

3.17 SINGULAR NUMBER

3.17.1 Where any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular number (such
as "the switch"), such reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are
required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.

3.18 CLEANING

3.18.1 Each day as the work proceeds and on completion, clean up and remove from the
premises all rubbish, surplus material, equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other
items used in the performance of the work. Clean out dirt and debris and leave the
buildings broom clean with no stains and in a condition acceptable to the Consultant.

3.18.2 Where items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, protect from over‐painting, etc.
and give all items a final cleaning before handing over of the project.

3.19 ACCESSIBILITY

3.19.1 Each item of equipment shall be located so as to be accessible for maintenance or repair
without removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts, or other materials. For
the large Air Handling units the Contractor shall ensure that these can be built up on site
from components which can be taken into the area. Any openings, framing or special
lifting equipment which may be required shall be included and provided by the
Contractor.

3.19.2 Cleanouts shall be located to permit rodding of all drain lines. These shall be located
wherever possible external to occupied areas, and to minimize spillage problems during
rodding.

3.20 INSPECTION, TESTING AND ADJUSTING

3.20.1 All the works provided as part of this Contract shall be inspected and commissioned in
accordance with all relevant British Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice and to
the entire satisfaction of the Consultant.

3.20.2 The Contractor shall employ the services of a specialist company approved by the
Consultant regularly engaged in providing a testing balancing and commissioning service
and who has been in continuous business for not less than 10 years employing fully
trained staff having not less than 7 years dedicated experience.

A senior experienced Commissioning Engineer with minimum dedicated experience of 7
years shall be responsible for supervising and directing the activities for the testing and
commissioning team.

3.20.3 Carry out all tests specified. Carry out all tests required by Authorities having jurisdiction.
Test equipment to the requirements of, and where necessary, in the presence of the
Manufacturer.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 22 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.20.4 Provide all equipment, labour, instruments, loading devices, incidentals, and pay for all
fuel, power and sundries required to carry out the tests.

3.20.5 All installations shall be inspected and tested in sections as the work proceeds and on
completion as composite systems and it shall be noted that the Consultant or any of the
other relevant Authorities may require inspection or testing any equipment during
manufacture at the Manufacturer's works. All necessary arrangements shall be made as
part of this Contract.

This will generally not apply to specified items unless specifically noted in these
documents, but may be necessary for alternate equipment, should this be considered at
all.

3.20.6 All tests shall be arranged in cooperation with the Consultant and all other concerned
parties and shall be subject to at least five (5) days notice in writing of the time, location
and nature of the test to be performed. No test shall be considered valid unless the
Consultant is present.

3.20.7 The contractor shall be responsible to arrange wild air during furnishing and painting as
per the project requirements and as per the engineer’s decision. Proper schedule for the
wild air arrangement shall be prepared and engineer’s approval shall be obtained. No
permanent installation shall be utilized for the purpose of wild air and temporary works
unless and until accepted and approved by the engineer in writing. All movable items
utilized for wild air / temporary works shall be completely replaced.

3.21 TEMPORARY USAGE

3.21.1 The Consultant reserves the right to use any piece of electrical and mechanical equipment,
device, or material installed under this section for such reasonable lengths of time as may
be required to make a complete and thorough test of same before the final completion and
acceptance of the work.

Such tests shall not be constructed as acceptance of any part of the work, and it is agreed
and understood that no claim for damage will be made for any injury or breakage to any
part or parts of the above due to these tests, where caused by weakness, inaccuracy of
parts, or by defective materials or workmanship.

3.22 INSPECTION OF THE WORK

3.22.1 The representatives of the Owner and the Consultant will make periodic visits to the site
during construction to ascertain that the work is being executed in reasonable conformity
with all plans and specifications, but will not execute quality control at all times. The
Contractor must maintain the quality control as intended in the contract documents.

3.22.2 Correct all deficiencies immediately as noted during field inspections.

3.22.3 Request in writing that a final inspection of all services.
Do not issue this written request until:
All deficiencies noted during job inspections have been corrected.
All systems have been balanced and tested and are ready for operation.
All balancing reports have been submitted and reviewed.
All instruction manuals have been submitted and reviewed.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 23 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

The cleaning up is finished in all respects.

All spare parts and replacement parts specified have been provided and receipt of the
same acknowledged.

3.23 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER

3.23.1 Instruct the Owner's staff how to make minor adjustments, carry out necessary
maintenance and how to operate each system.

For new equipment, provide the Consultant with three copies of complete operating and
maintenance instructions for equipment at the time of delivery of the equipment.

Equipment will be rejected unless accompanied by instructions. Such documents must be
received at least one month prior to the completion date of the relative section of the
works.

Instructions shall be bound in a suitable loose leaf booklet or binder, and shall include:

a) Prints of the following drawings:

1) List of all equipment installed.
2) General layout.
3) Wiring diagram of control panels.
4) Non‐dimensional layout, showing location of all electrical devices (Limit
Switches etc.).

b) Operation instructions include start‐up and shutdown procedure.

c) Maintenance instructions, including preventative maintenance instructions for
components of the equipment.

d) Lubricating instruction and recommended cycle of lubrication.

e) Complete parts list, showing manufacturer's name and catalogue number.

f) Complete list of recommended spare parts with price list for each item of
equipment.

The contractor is to prepare a draft for discussion with the Consultant prior to finalizing
the documents. Portable tools and spare parts shall be correctly labeled and handed over
to the Consultant.

3.23.2 The section dealing with complete systems shall be subdivided into each service with a
ready means of reference and detailed index. The function and manner of operation of
each system shall be clearly described together with illustrations and line diagrams in
schematic form showing the location and function of control valves, items of equipment
and spaces or areas which are served by these items. The color coding and identification
systems employed shall be explained.

3.24 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

3.24.1 The ultimate condition for system acceptance is that the Owner and Consultant have
inspected the system and found it to be acceptable, and indicated this in writing.

Issuance of the final payment certificate does not necessarily indicate system acceptance,
neither does release of final payment holdback in whole or in part. The Consultant's

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 24 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

acceptance may be contingent on any or all of the following if applicable.

3.24.2 Submit original copies of letters from manufacturers of all systems indicating that their
technical representatives have inspected and tested the respective systems and are
satisfied with the methods of installation, connections and operation.
3.24.3 Submit "as built" drawings and operation and maintenance manuals.

3.24.4 Train owner's maintenance staff.

3.24.5 Satisfactory completion of 12 months guarantee period.

3.25 CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION

3.25.1 Remedy all work in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract for a period of one
year from the date of acceptance of the completed work, or if so noted, for longer periods
for parts of the work.

3.25.2 Attend immediately to any and all the defects occurring during the period defined above
and repair in a manner to prevent recurrence. This contractor is responsible for all work
required by other trades necessary to repair the works of this section, or necessary to
repair damage caused by the failure of any part of this section.

3.25.3 Instruct all Suppliers and Manufacturers that guarantees on equipment will commence
when the completed work is accepted and not from the date the equipment is put into
operation. In the event that this condition is omitted by the supplier, or if subsequent cost
to the Owner is involved, this Contractor shall be liable to the full extent of the guarantee
as indicated in the specification.

3.26 WARRANTY

3.26.1 The Contractor will guarantee all material and workmanship for at least one year after the
issue of final completion certificate issue and take over by the Owner or as mentioned on
any related contract documents conditions of the contract whichever is higher.
3.26.2 All warrantees from equipment suppliers will be vested in the Owner, regardless of
whether the Contractor who supplied the equipment is still associated with the project or
not.

3.26.3 Guarantees will be full guarantees and will include all overhead, profit, incidental charges
and sundries.

3.26.4 Where damage is caused to any other item by any failure of the item guaranteed, and then
the guarantee shall also include the costs incurred in rectifying that damage.

3.27 MAINTENANCE

3.27.1 Maintenance is defined as the Contractual Liability to maintain the equipment in working
condition, plus the regular checks and servicing of equipment during the maintenance
period to keep the equipment in best working order.

3.27.2 Regular maintenance shall be as necessary, but in any event not less frequently than
monthly.

3.27.3 In the event that the Owner has his own staff, the Contractor is still to check monthly and
advice on any problems and is still to assume responsibility.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 25 of 26

Section 01 05 00
MEP General Requirements CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.28 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

3.28.1 The standard specification for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based
on relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and
complying to intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered
subject to proper compliance / justification to the satisfaction of engineer.

END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 26 of 26
 ANNEXURE – 02
21 1339 FOAM SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

  
Section 21 13 39
Foam Suppression System CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

FOAM FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

CONTENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM INCLUDES
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.1 MATERIAL

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
3.3 STANDARD SPECIFICATION


























Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 6

  
Section 21 13 39
Foam Suppression System CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM INCLUDES

1.1.1 Compliance with other relative sections, base built specifications.

1.1.2 Conform to General Requirements for MEP Services of section 01 05 00.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.2.1 This section covers the supply and installation of pre‐engineered Fire extinguishing systems.

The zones of protection shall be clearly indicated on the Fire Protection shop drawings. The
system shall be fully designed and installed by an approved, licensed specialist.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies.

a) The whole of the installation shall be according to the BS or NFPA standards and local
civil defense authority requirements.
b) All related electrical works shall comply to the requirements of Division 26.
c) Local Civil Defense Authority requirements

1.3.2 Reference Standards

a) National Fire Protection Association.
b) British Standard Specification

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Shop Drawings and Product Data:

Calculations to include:
Volume of space
Concentration to be maintained
Pipe sizing & nozzle sizing
Discharge time etc.

Drawings to include: ‐

Plans
Schematic
Wiring details
Fixing details etc.

Compliance Statement

All submittals shall include a detailed clause‐wise compliance statement.

Materials
All materials submittals shall include detailed catalogues, product literature descriptions of all
equipment with selection charts, capacities etc.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 6

  
Section 21 13 39
Foam Suppression System CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

All materials submittals shall include copies of the relevant standards.

1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA

Contractor shall provide maintenance data, list of spare parts, product data and include all these
items in the maintenance manual.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.1 MATERIAL

2.1.1 Foam System

The sprinkler system shall be a closed‐head wet pipe AFFF foam water sprinkler system designed
to provide adequately proportioned foam water solution at listed water flows past proportioning
device. System shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 16, Standard for the Installation of
Closed Head Foam‐Water Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 11, and Standard for Low Expansion Foam,
NFPA 13, Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems, local civil defense regulations and all
other applicable codes or requirements.

System Devices

a) Alarm Valve

Wet sprinkler systems shall be equipped with an alarm valve designed to initiate an alarm
during sustained water flow. The valve shall be UL Listed/Factory Mutual Approved for
installation in the vertical or horizontal position and have an operating pressure up to
250 PSI (17 BAR). The valve shall be equipped with an external bypass to eliminate false
water flow alarms and gauge connections on the system side and supply side of the valve
clapper. Valve body to be ductile iron and trim galvanized.

b) Concentrate Controller (Proportioner)

Foam concentrate shall be introduced into the water flow by a concentrate controller
utilizing balanced‐pressure injection. Concentrate controller shall be a UL listed or FM
approved device. Concentrate controller shall be listed and approved with the foam
concentrate to be proportioned and the foam bladder tank. Concentrate controller shall
be a brass, wafer or threaded type device. The concentrate controller shall be listed with a
nominal orifice plate size for the foam concentrate to be proportioned.

c) Foam Bladder Tank

Provide a low expansion foam bladder tank system for storage of the foam concentrate.
The tank shall be stamped as meeting ASME pressure vessel requirements and UL
Listed/FM Approved for use with the foam concentrate and proportioning method
utilized. Foam bladder tank shall be located as close to the riser as practical and located to
allow adequate access for filling and inspection. Connect bladder tank water supply to the
system riser at or above the level of the top of the tank and provide a primary relief valve.
Foam bladder tank shall be UL listed and FM approved.

d) Concentrate Control Valve

Install a deluge valve utilized as a concentrate control valve between the bladder tank and
concentrate controller. The CCV valve shall open automatically when the sprinkler system

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 6

  
Section 21 13 39
Foam Suppression System CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

experiences water flow. The CCV shall be UL Listed/FM Approved for use on fire
protection systems and have an operating pressure up to 250 PSI (17 BAR) and utilize a
90° or straight‐through pattern type of deluge valve manufactured with a corrosive
resistant coating. Concentrate control valve trim shall be compatible and installed
following the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

e) Foam Concentrate Piping

Foam concentrate piping shall be compatible with foam concentrate to be used. Foam
provider shall be consulted for acceptable materials of construction. Foam concentrate
piping shall be designed for the least equivalent feet of pipe run from bladder tank
discharge outlet to proportioning device and water supply to bladder tank. Excessive use
of elbows and tees shall be avoided. Foam concentrate piping shall be substantially
secured and restrained against movement, thrust and vibration. Foam concentrate piping
shall be protected from excessive heat and freezing temperatures. Foam concentrate
piping shall be installed with a fitting such as a grooved coupling or union to be readily
removed between proportioning assembly and concentrate control valve.

f) Foam Concentrate

Synthetic Aqueous Film Forming Foam (AFFF) or Alcohol Resistant Aqueous Film
Forming Foam (AR‐AFFF) shall be utilized. Water‐soluble liquids shall be protected with
Alcohol resistant type foam concentrate. Foam concentrates shall be UL Listed or FM
Approved for the required application as well as for use with proportioning equipment
and discharge devices. Stored foam concentrate shall not be a mixture of different types
and/or brands and shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines.

g) Discharge Devices

Closed head sprinklers that have been specifically tested and found suitable for the
discharge of low expansion synthetic foam/water solution shall be installed. Standard
sprinklers used for discharge outlets shall have been tested for minimum densities or
minimum pressures as foam/water solution discharge outlets. Discharge devices shall be
UL listed or FM approved for the application for which they are used. Closed head
sprinklers shall be UL listed or FM approved for use with the foam concentrate being
used.

h) Alarm Pressure Switch

Provide an alarm pressure switch to facilitate the transmission of an alarm during water‐
flow conditions. The switch shall be factory adjusted to operate with a pressure increase
of 5‐7 psi and water flow equal to or in excess of the discharge from one sprinkler. The
switch shall be UL Listed/FM Approved for operating pressures up to 250 psi (17 BAR)
and capable of being wired for a class A or class B circuit. Housing for the switch shall be
NEMA 4 rated incorporating tamper‐resistant screws. The alarm pressure switch shall be
Potter PS101A or PS102A.

i) System Overhead Piping

Overhead sprinkler piping shall be in accordance with materials deemed acceptable by
NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 16, Standard for the
Installation of Foam‐Water Sprinkler Systems and all other applicable building standards.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 6

  
Section 21 13 39
Foam Suppression System CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

System Control Valve

Low Flow Foam system control valve shall consist of a listed indicating type of control
valve. Control valve shall be listed for use in fire protection systems. Control valve shall be
rated for system working water pressure not less than 175 PSI.

Hangers and Supports

System piping shall be substantially supported from the building structure. The
installation of hangers and supports shall adhere to the requirements set forth in NFPA
13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

Materials used in the installation or construction of hangers and supports shall be listed
and approved for such application. Hangers or supports not specifically listed for service
shall be designed and bear the seal of a specialist.

Fire Department Connection

A system fire department connection shall be provided on the system riser in accordance
with NFPA 16, Standard for Installation of Foam‐Water Sprinkler Systems. Fire
department connection shall be of a brass body with an integral clapper assembly to
separate flow between inlets. Fire department connection shall be installed in an area
accessible for the first response unit. Actual fire department location shall be installed
and located only after proper coordination with fire officials. Fire department connection
shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection use.

Underground Piping

Piping and fittings used for the installation of underground water mains shall be listed for
such service. Local water system requirements shall be adhered to. Compatible fittings
and connection methods shall be reviewed with the water department authority.
Standards of the AWWA and NFPA 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service
Mains and Their Appurtenances shall be minimum installation guidelines.

Drains and Flushing Connections

System drains shall adhere to the requirements set forth in NFPA 13, Standard for the
Installation of Sprinkler Systems. Flushing connections shall be provided where system
piping is subject to accumulation of sediments or where periodic flushing is required by
the Authority Having Jurisdiction. System auxiliary drains shall be installed so that the
drain valve is accessible and labeled as a sprinkler system drain. Drains shall terminate to
the exterior of the building where practical. Drains that do terminate to the exterior shall
be installed with a 45° elbow directed to a splash block or other permanent erosion
limiting material.

Riser Test Connections

A test connection shall be provided on the system riser with a downstream isolation valve
for the purpose of testing foam proportioning. System test header shall be of adequate
size for at least a mid‐range flow of the proportioning system. System test header shall be
installed with a means of draining any trapped sections of discharge piping subject to
freezing.

System Supervision

Control valves larger than 2” in size shall be equipped with UL listed and FM approved
supervisory switches. Control valves 2” and smaller shall be sealed in the position of their
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 6

Section 21 13 39
Foam Suppression System CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

normal operating condition. Others shall execute the termination of supervisory switch
wires. Supervisory switches shall be Potter Electrical Signal Company Control Valve
Supervisory Switch.

System Commissioning

Foam water sprinkler system shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 11, NFPA 13, NFPA
16 and all other applicable codes and jurisdictions. An owner’s representative, local fire
officials and a representative of the installing contractor shall witness foam‐
proportioning tests. Additional foam concentrate shall be provided for testing by the
installing contractor. The installing contractor shall provide maintenance and material
safety data sheets (MSDS) to the owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

In the event of fire signal the appropriate zone LED and common alarm LED will illuminate first
stage bell circuits and common relay will activate. If the fire signal is from another zone then the
first stage relay output will operate. Operation of the alarm silence switch will silence the first
stage bell output leaving the zone indication illuminated and the relay output switched.
Activation of another zone will cause the alarm sounders reactivate. Activation of two zones will
cause the extinguishing alarm sequence and 2nd stage sounders and second relays to operate
which shall be provided to initiate the extinguishing system and shut off room A/C dampers.

In the event of the fault signal the common fault will illuminate and the internal buzzer will
sound. Should the fault be on a zone circuit the appropriate zone indicator will illuminate as well.

Locate the cylinders outside the protected space where possible. In the event the cylinders have
to be inside the protected space, locate the control panel and manual release outside the space.

System shall interface with the fire alarm system to indicate:

System operational Status

System stage alarm
System discharging
Common fault alarm

3.2 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Carry out testing and commissioning of clean agent system as required by NFPA 2001 for
approval of systems. A discharge test is not required.

3.3 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

3.3.1 The standard specifications for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based on
relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and complying with
intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered subject to proper
compliance / justification to the satisfaction of Employer’s representative.

END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 6 of 6
 ANNEXURE – 03
26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 26 05 33
Raceway & Boxes CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

RACE WAY AND BOXES

CONTENTS


SUBSECTION TITLE

PART ‐ 1 GENERAL
1.1 Section Includes
1.2 Related Sections
1.3 References
1.4 Submittals for Review
1.5 Quality Assurance
1.6 Qualifications
1.7 Warranty

PART ‐ 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Conduit and fittings
2.2 Conduit and Accessories
2.3 Flexible GI Conduit
2.4 Outlet Boxes
2.5 GI boxes
2.6 SS Junction Boxes
2.7 Telephone, Power and Communications
2.8 Television Outlets

PART ‐ 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
3.2 Installation
3.3 Works
3.4 Field Quality Control
3.5 Cleaning
3.6 Protection of Finished Work
3.7 Standard Specification

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 8

Section 26 05 33
Raceway & Boxes CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART – 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1.1.1 Compliance with other relative sections, base built specifications

1.1.2 Conform to General Requirements for MEP Services of section 01 05 00

1.1.3 This section supplements The Employer’s Requirements and forms part of every section of
Division 26 Electrical and shall be read in conjunction with Section 26 27 26.

1.1.4 Include the Employer’s Requirements as part of this section.

1.1.5 The Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the Specifications affecting work of
this trade.

1.1.6 Furnish all labour, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all necessary
operations required to execute the work of this section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1.2.1 This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the related sections within the
Project Specifications. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's
responsibility to ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full Scope of Works
intended.

26 06 00 Basic Electrical materials & methods
26 05 19 Wires and cable
26 27 26 Wiring accessories

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be those standards referred to
or relevant BSI standards. In addition, the following additional standards also apply: Where ADDC
standards exceed other standards they supersede other standards.

1.3.2 Codes:

Galvanised steel conduits BS 4568
Black stove enamelled conduit BS 458
Rigid PVC conduit BS 4607 part‐I & II
Flexible steel conduits
And adaptors BS 731 part‐I
Standard Circular boxes BS 31, BS 4568 part‐II
BS 7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations)
BS EN 60423 & BS EN 61386
ADDC Regulations

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

1.4.1 Submit samples, specifications, engineering calculations, catalogue cut sheets, description of
product and installation method in accordance with the Contract Documents. Submissions shall
indicate all dimensions, details of construction, and details of installations, relation and
connections with adjoining work.


Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 8

Section 26 05 33
Raceway & Boxes CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.4.2 Submit copies of test reports required to be performed on the proposed products. Submit a list of
installation completed where proposed products were used.

1.4.3 Submit all test results and certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1 Perform Work in accordance with relevant British Standards and industry standard codes.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6.1 Only skilled electricians with appropriate training, experience and qualifications shall be allowed
to undertake electrical testing.

1.7 WARRANTY

1.7.1 All materials shall have a standard 12 month warranty from the time of handing over. The
Contractor shall allow for extended warranties beyond this period where indicated in this
document or elsewhere within the main contract documents. The extended warranties shall be in
the Client’s name and be handed over at the time of practical completion and/or during handing
over of project.

PART – 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

2.1.1 Rigid Steel Conduit for all surface mounted installations:

1. Conduit. Rigid hot‐dipped galvanized steel (RGS) conduit with zinc‐coated threads and an
outer coating of zinc chromate.

2. Fittings. Threaded steel or malleable iron, either cadmium plated or hot‐dipped galvanized.

2.1.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit only for concealed installation in screed or concrete:

1. Conduit. Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC).

2. Fittings. Solvent weld socket type.

2.1.3 Flexible Metal Conduit with LSZH coating:

1. Conduit. Spiral‐wound, square‐locked, hot‐dipped galvanized steel strip.
Coated with LSZH material.

2. Fittings. One‐screw and two‐screw for 12 inches and larger, double‐clamp steel or malleable
iron, either cadmium plated or hot‐dipped galvanized.

2.1.4 Liquid‐tight Flexible Steel Conduit for all external installations:

1. Conduit. Spiral wound, square locked, hot dipped galvanized steel strip plus a bonded outer
jacket of PVC.

2. Fittings. Compression type, malleable iron, with insulated throat, either cadmium plated or
hot dipped galvanized.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 8

 Section 26 05 33
Raceway & Boxes CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.2 CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES

2.2.1 All conduits embedded in concrete, plaster and screed unless otherwise specified shall be extra
heavy wall black PVC and shall conform to BS 4607 & IEC 423. All surface conduits shall be heavy
gauge, welded, screwed and galvanized steel in accordance with BS 4508.

2.2.2 PVC Conduits shall be black of the extra heavy wall with 1.8mm minimum thickness for 20mm dia
conduit.

2.2.3 Steel conduits shall be of the heavy gauge galvanized steel, welded and screwed type zinc coated,
hot dipped galvanized both inside and outside BS EN 60423 & BS EN 61386 classy protection.

2.2.4 All set, fixing and wood screws used throughout the installation shall be brass.

2.2.5 Accessories mounting box shall be provided with brass earth terminal and shall be supplied with
adjustable steel grids.

2.2.6 Conduit boxes for steel conduit systems shall be malleable iron with screwed spout outlets, blind
cover fixing holes, galvanized and water proof with external lugs where required.

2.2.7 Each steel conduit thread shall be given a coat of aluminium paint upon completion of conduit
installation.

2.2.8 All circular PVC boxes or GI HD if exposed where used to support lighting fittings shall be
provided with steel insert clips.

2.2.9 The sizes of the conduits for all wiring shall be in accordance to IEE regulations and ADDC
Standards and shall be such that a cable can be withdrawn and another drawn in without
disturbing the remainder. However, the size of the conduit shall not be less than 20mm where
used for lighting and power circuits and 25mm for telephone / data wiring.

2.3 FLEXIBLE GI CONDUITS

2.3.1 LSZH sheathed and watertight Flexible metal conduits shall be provided between the conduit
system and electrical motors or other apparatus subject to vibration. They shall be complete with
brass double female adaptors and will be soldered to either end of all flexible conduits and
connected to solid conduit entries using smooth bore male brass bushes.

2.3.2 Earth continuity through flexible conduits shall be provided by a separate earth continuity
conductor, sized in accordance with BS Standards. The brass adaptor specified above shall be
drilled so that the earth wire can be brought out at each end. The earth wire shall be soldered at
each end to the brass adaptors or alternatively connected to a substantial earth terminal. The
maximum length of flexible conduit run shall be 2.5 mtr.

2.4 OUTLET BOXES

2.4.1 Flush Device Boxes:

Provide galvanized steel boxes of minimum 1.2mm thickness and sufficient size to accommodate
wiring devices to be installed at outlet. Provide an extension ring for the device(s) to be installed.
Square or rectangular boxes may be used. Unless otherwise noted, provide minimum 1‐1/2 inch
deep by 4‐inch square minimum size box.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 8

Section 26 05 33
Raceway & Boxes CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.4.2 Exposed Device Boxes:

Provide FS or FD cast boxes for surface mounting in areas having exposed rigid steel conduit
systems.

2.4.3 Boxes for Lighting Fixtures:

Provide galvanized steel octagonal boxes with fixture stud supports and attachments as required
to properly support ceiling and bracket‐type lighting fixtures. Unless otherwise noted, provide 1‐
1/2‐inch deep by 4‐inch box.

2.4.4 Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes:

Galvanized steel or PVC type boxes with screw‐on or hinged cover, code gauge and size to carry
conduit bushes and wires.

2.4.5 Blank Cover Plate:

Blank cover plate to be installed on outlet boxes which has no apparatuses installed or where
apparatus are installed but does not have suitable cover for box. Blank cover plates for wall
outlets are to be attached by a bridge for horizontal and vertical adjustments.

2.4.6 Molded Plastic Outlet Boxes:

1. Type:

Boxes and covers used with PVC conduit systems are to be heavy gauge pressure molded
plastic, minimum 2mm thick, self‐extinguishing, with softening point not less than 85 deg.
C.Boxes are to have provision for securely terminating conduits and are to be
manufacturer’s standard for required application.

2. Fittings:

Boxes are to have brass inset threads to receive cover screws and for mounting devices or
accessories, push‐fit brass earth terminals and steel insert clips to provide additional
support for pendants or for heat conduction. Neoprene gaskets are to be provided for
weatherproof installation.

2.5 GI BOXES

2.5.1 GI boxes to be provided with brass earth terminal to facilitate earth wire connection. The boxes to
have sufficient number of 20mm and 25mm knockout with minimum 1.2mm thickness and shall
comply with BS 4662. Boxes to have adjustable lug for proper installations of wiring accessories.
Extension ring to be used along with GI boxes, in places where the box is deep inside the wall,
marble or concrete. Deep boxes to be provided for telephone outlets.

2.6 SS JUNCTION BOXES
 Stainless Steel Junction Boxes,

 Ensure Stainless Steel Junction Box is rated for use in outdoor corrosive environments and
provide water‐tight sea

 NEMA 4X, UL 508A Listed , IEC 60529, IP66

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 8

Section 26 05 33
Raceway & Boxes CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

 14 gauge Type 304 Stainless Steel body and door ,

 Continuously welded smooth seams

 Single door, and seamless foam‐in‐place gasket or neoprene gasket attached to door with oil
resistant adhesive

 Rolled lip around three sides of door

 Screw‐down clamps

 Stainless Steel door clamp assembly

 Hasp and staple for padlocking

 Bonding and grounding provisions

2.7 TELEPHONE, POWER AND COMMUNICATION OUTLETS

2.7.1 Telephone and communication outlets shall be as specified under "Outlet Boxes". Cover plates
material and finish as specified under "Device Cover Plates".

2.8 TELEVISION OUTLETS

2.8.1 Television outlets shall be as specified under "Outlet Boxes". Coverplates shall be blank of material
and finish as specified under "Device Cover Plates".

2.8.2 Conduit generally shall comprise minimum 25 mm runs from flush outlets terminated at
communication backboards, for installation of cable by System Supplier.

PART – 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

3.1.1 Before undertaking any testing, verify that building electrical and mechanical systems are
completed and correctly installed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Conduit shall be 20 & 25 mm trade size minimum, and shall be cleared and free from water. Provide
pull wires installed continuously from outlet to outlet and fastened at each box.

3.2.2 Conduit shall have not more than two 90 degree or equivalent bends and 20 metres between outlets
or pull boxes, and bending radius shall not be less than 10 times the conduit diameter. Conduit ends
to be identified with gray paint.

3.2.3 Distribution conduits for telephone wall outlets shall be 25 mm minimum size for one outlet and 25
mm minimum size from two outlets, to equipment backboard, in accordance with requirements of
telephone supplier.

3.2.4 Provide a 25 mm conduit run from the telephone communication backboard to the electrical service
ground to provide for ground conductor.

3.2.5 Provide a 25 mm conduits for all other services like TV, CCTV, Access control etc.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 6 of 8
Section 26 05 33
Raceway & Boxes CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.2.6 Distribution conduits for communication wall outlets shall be 25 mm for two outlets, and 25 mm for
up to four outlets, to telephone/ communication backboard.

3.2.7 Conduit above false ceiling shall be GI type as per DM circuler.

3.2.8 Any conduiting work shall be as per ADDC standard.

3.2.9 Spacing of Conduits Supports

Steel Rigid PVC
Horizontal 120 100
Vertical 150 120

3.2.10 The size of conduits selected shall be allow drawing the cables freely within, without damaging
the insulation.

3.2.11 The Contractor to ensure the number of cables drawn through 20R5, 32 mm conduits against the
size of cables like 1.5, 2.5, 4.0, 6.0 etc. shall be as per local authority regulation.

3.3 WORKS

3.3.1 Before beginning testing in any area, examine all parts of the adjoining structure and systems.
Should any conditions be found which will prevent the proper execution of the work, installation
shall not proceed in that area until such conditions are corrected by the contractor.

3.3.2 Work includes, but is not limited to:

3.3.2.1 Provide a complete interconnecting system of empty conduits with pull wires, ducts, pull boxes,
backboxes, other raceways as noted, and outlets for the enclosure of communication equipment
wiring and as hereinafter specified:

a. Lighting System
b. Power Distribution
c. Fire Detection System
d. CCTV & Acces control System

3.3.2.2 Provide 100/150mm Ducts for Power in take, Telephone intake or for other purpose as specified in
the base built specification.

3.3.2.3 Provide complete systems of empty conduits with fish wires, backboxes, pull boxes and terminal
cabinets as described further herein for the installation of the telephone/communication and other
systems as well as authority requirement.

3.3.2.4 Co‐ordinate work to ensure compatibility of conduit provisions before installation.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.4.1 Provide field quality control as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

3.5.1 Cleaning installed work as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

3.5.2 Remove labels after Work is complete.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 7 of 8

Section 26 05 33
Raceway & Boxes CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

3.6.1 Protect work as indicated in the Employer’s Requirements.

3.6.2 Provide temporary protection to finished work of others during testing. Remove upon
Completion.

3.7 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

3.7.1 The standard specifications for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based on
relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and complying with
intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered subject to proper
compliance / justification to the satisfaction of Employer’s representative.

3.7.2 This standard specification is intended to be used as a helpful indication of work within this
section. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's responsibility
to ascertain and complete the full works intended and as specified in the specification and
Contract or thereby implied.




END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 8 of 8



ANNEXURE – 04
26 0583 EQUIPMENT TERMINATION

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 26 05 83
Equipment Termination CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

EQUIPMENT TERMINATION

CONTENTS


SUBSECTION TITLE

PART – 1 GENERAL
1.1 Section Includes
1.2 Related Sections
1.3 References
1.4 Submittals for Review
1.5 Quality Assurance
1.6 Qualifications
1.7 Mock up
1.8 Environmental Requirements
1.9 Warranty

PART – 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Product Requirements

PART – 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 Examination
3.2 Handling and Storage
3.3 Installation
3.4 Field Quality Control
3.5 Cleaning
3.6 Protection of finished work
3.7 Standard Specification

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 6

Section 26 05 83
Equipment Termination CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART – 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1.1.1 Compliance with other relative sections, base built specifications.

1.1.2 Conform to General Requirements for MEP Services of section 01 05 00.

1.1.3 The Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the Specifications affecting work of
this trade.

1.1.4 Furnish all labour, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all necessary
operations required to execute the work of this section.

1.1.5 This section describes the technical requirement and workmanship requirements for electrical
terminations at fixed equipment such as motors etc.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1.2.1 This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the related sections within the
Project Specifications. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's
responsibility to ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full Scope of Works
intended.

 26 06 00 Basic material and method
 26 05 53 Electrical Identification
 26 05 29 Containment
 26 51 00 Lamps and Luminaries

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be those standards referred to
or relevant BSI standards such as BS 7671 (IEE 16th Edition Working Regulations).

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

1.4.1 Submit samples, specifications, engineering calculations, catalogue cut sheets, description of
product and installation method in accordance with the Contract Documents. Submissions shall
indicate all dimensions, details of construction, detail of installation, relation and connections
with adjoining work.

1.4.2 Scale working details showing physical details of terminations.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1 Perform Work in accordance with relevant British Standards and industry standard codes.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6.1 All terminations shall be performed by competent electricians.

1.7 MOCK‐UP

1.7.1 One type of each termination shall be mocked up and presented to the Engineer for approval.


Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 6

Section 26 05 83
Equipment Termination CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1.8.1 The termination method and materials shall be suitable for the equipment in which the work will
be undertaken and deployed.

1.9 WARRANTY

1.9.1 All materials shall have a standard 12 month warranty from time of handing over. The Contractor
shall allow for extended warranties beyond this period where indicated in this document or
elsewhere within the main contract documents. The extended warranties shall be in the Client’s
name and be handed over at the time of practical completion.

PART – 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

2.1.1 General

 The following clauses specify standard connection methods for a range of appliances and
motors and these methods shall be used unless otherwise indicated. For connections to
luminaries refer to Section 26 51 00

 Switches or fused connectors shall be located at 150mm from appliances except where
otherwise stated in the following clauses or otherwise indicated.

 A protective conductor shall connect the earthing terminal of each appliance or motor to an
earthing terminal incorporated in the adjacent switch or connector box.

 Flexible cords shall include a protective conductor except where used in a non‐conducting
location for connection to class II or class III equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

 For connection to appliances which may require to be moved for maintenance or cleaning,
the flexible cord shall be 1500mm long.

2.1.2 Remote apparatus Served from Surface Isolation / Control Equipment

 In a conduit installation where the final isolation/control equipment is remotely located

from the electrical apparatus being served, a conduit link shall be installed from the
isolation/control equipment to terminate adjacent to the apparatus in a fixed through type
conduit box complete with lid.

 Flexible conduit shall connect the conduit box with the apparatus in accordance with this
specification with particular emphasis on the correct method of earthing as required by the
BS 7671 (IEE Regulations).

 Cables serving the electrical apparatus shall be continuous throughout their length, passing
unbroken through the conduit box and flexible conduit. Connectors fitted inside the conduit
box shall not be permitted unless so directed by the Engineer.

2.1.3 Remote Apparatus served from Flush Mounted Final Isolation/Control Equipment.

 A conduit recessed into the building fabric shall link the final flush mounted isolator/control
equipment to a conduit termination (end) box recessed adjacent to the apparatus. An
extension box with conduit spout outlet shall be fixed to the terminal box using the fixing
lugs provided, a break joint ring being fitted between the two. The screws securing the

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 6
Section 26 05 83
Equipment Termination CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

extension box shall not form part of the earth path, a separate earth being obtained from the
recessed conduit box.

 The apparatus shall be connected to the extension box using cables enclosed in the flexible
conduit as previously described.

 Extension boxes in kitchens and food preparation areas shall be fabricated from stainless
steel.

2.1.4 Insulated and Sheathed Cable Installations

 Where LSF insulated and sheathed multi‐core cables are used to serve an item of electrical
apparatus they shall terminate adjacent to the apparatus in a suitable connection unit
and/or isolating switch as specified.

 Final connection shall be made using an insulated and sheathed multi‐crore flexible cable or
cord restrained at each end by either cord or grips forming part of the connection unit and
apparatus or approved packing glands correctly sized to the flexible cable or cord used and
fixed to the connection unit and apparatus by a coupling and smooth bore brush or entered
directly into the apparatus by a tapped conduit entry if possible.

 Final connection to domestic electrical cooker shall be made using a proprietary cooker
outlet connection unit.

2.1.5 Water Heaters

 The cable from the switch or fused connector shall be connected directly to the terminals on
the heater.

 The location of the switch or fused connector shall be as indicated.

 For instantaneous water heaters mounted in bathrooms and kitchens, the conduit shall be
concealed in the building fabric and terminated at wall finish. Where possible the
connection shall enter through the back of the heater, but otherwise the circular conduit box
shall be located immediately adjacent to the conduit entry of the heater, fitted with a dome
lid and connected to the heater by steel conduit.

2.1.6 Cookers

 The final circuit wiring shall connect from the cooker control unit to a cooker connection
outlet located immediately behind the appliance; the wiring shall be concealed in the
building fabric.

2.1.7 Waste Disposal Units (Domestic)

 The fused connection unit shall be located adjacent to the sink. The flex outlet shall be under
the sink as near as possible to the waste disposal unit.

2.1.8 Sanitary Disposal Units

 Conduit from the fused connection unit shall be connected directly to the unit and unless
otherwise indicated, concealed in the building fabric.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 6

Section 26 05 83
Equipment Termination CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.1.9 Extract fans

 The connections to small single phase fans shall be indicated.

 Connections to larger fans shall be as indicated

2.1.10 Plant Machinery and Motors

 Connections shall allow for vibration and, for the movement of the motor along slide rails on
belt drives.

 Termination of armoured cables shall be suitable for the mechanical stresses imposed, and
the length of cable support shall allow sufficient flexibility of the cable.

 Termination of conduit shall be by flexible steel conduit or pliable conduit as appropriate.
The flexible or pliable conduit shall be not more than 1m long.

 Termination of mineral‐insulated cables include a 360 loop not less than 150mm diameter
immediately adjacent to the cable entry to the plant, machinery or motor. A clear space of
not less than 10mm shall be allowed at the point where the cable passes itself.

PART – 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

3.1.1 Verify site conditions as Section 26 05 00.

3.1.2 Before ordering any materials / commencing work verify that building structure associated with
the system is within tolerance and take full account of shape configuration and material
properties of the structure.

3.2 HANDLING AND STORAGE

3.2.1 Deliver component parts to site, completely identified in accordance with shop and certified
drawings prepared for this work. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above
ground, properly protected from the weather and construction activities.

3.3 INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Before beginning installation in any area, examine all parts of the adjoining work into which
applicable work is to be placed. Should any conditions be found which will prevent the proper
execution of the work, installation shall not proceed in that area until such conditions are
corrected by the contractor.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.4.1 Provide field quality control as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

3.5.1 Cleaning installed work as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

3.5.2 Remove labels after Work is complete.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 6

Section 26 05 83
Equipment Termination CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

3.6.1 Protect work as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

3.7 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

3.7.1 The standard specifications for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based on
relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and complying to
intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered subject to proper
compliance / justification to the satisfaction of engineer

3.7.2 This standard specification is intended to be used as a helpful indication of work within this
section. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's responsibility
to ascertain and complete the full works intended and as specified in the specification and
Contract or thereby implied.



END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 6 of 6



ANNEXURE – 05
26 0600 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS

CONTENTS

SUBSECTION TITLE

PART – 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1.2 BASIC DESIGN
1.3 REFERENCES
1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.5 TRAINING AND MISCELLANEOUS
1.6 OFF LOADING, CARTAGE, STORAGE ETC.
1.7 COORDINATION
1.8 PRODUCTS
1.9 SOURCE INSPECTIONS
1.10 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.11 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS / OPERATING
CONDITIONS

1.12 INCOMING POWER SUPPLY /SUB STATION L.V.
FACILITIES

PART – 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.2 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE
2.3 RACEWAYS
2.4 WIRE & CABLE
2.5 DEVICES
2.6 DEVICES ‐ SPECIALIZED
2.7 DEVICE COVER PLATES
2.8 MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD (MDB)
2.9 SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION
BOARDS (SMDB)
2.10 DISTRIBUTION BOARD (DB)
2.11 STANDBY GENERATORS
2.12 HIGH RUPTURING CAPACITY
(HRC)FUSES

2.13 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

2.14 MOULDED CASE & MINIATURE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.15 CONTACTORS
2.16 MCC (MOTOR CONTROL CENTER)
2.17 MOTOR STARTER CONTROL
CIRCUIT

2.18 SWITCHES/ISOLATORS
2.19 CAPACITOR BANK
2.20 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING
PROTECTION

2.21 UPS SYSTEM

2.22 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS
2.23 TELEPHONE, CATV & DATA
SYSTEM

PART – 3 EXECUTION
3.1 HOLES & DRILLING
3.2 CUTTING & PATCHING
3.3 EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
3.4 CONCRETE WORKS
3.5 HANGERS & INSERTS
3.6 PAINTING
3.7 NAME PLATES & SCHEDULES
3.8 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING &
FEEDER CABLES

3.9 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND WIRE

WAYS

3.10 WIRE & CABLE

3.11 GENERAL PURPOSE SMALL POWER AND
PROVISION OF HAND DRYERS
3.12 CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING, CONDUITS AND
TELECOM CONDUIT INSTALLATION

3.13 SUPPLIES TO MECHANICAL PLANT

3.14 LOW CURRENT (ELV) SYSTEM
3.15 FACILITIES FOR TELECOM SYSTEMS
3.16 OUTLET, JUNCTION & PULL BOXES
3.17 PANEL BOARDS
3.18 ELECTRIC WORK FOR OTHER
DIVISIONS

3.19 GROUNDING ‐ GENERAL

3.20 WATERTIGHT SEAL AT EXTERIOR WALLS

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.21 FIREPROOFING & SEALING

3.22 TESTING OF SPECIALIST
EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS
3.23 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART‐1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

1.1.1 Compliance with other relative sections, base built specifications.

1.1.2 Conform to General Requirements for MEP Services of section 01 05 00.

1.1.2 Allowance for all of material to provide complete and operational installation to the satisfaction
of the Employer’s representatives. All incidental components and appurtenance necessary for
the proper operation of the systems shall be provided and installed as required whether or not
they are specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents.

1.1.3 This Particular specification shall be read in conjunction with the following Standard
Specifications. The Standard Specifications shall apply in full unless specified otherwise in this
section. In the event of a discrepancy between this specification and the above standard
specifications, this specification shall prevail.

1.1.4 Any changes in the quantity due to Authority requirement and other then additional
requirement from Employer / architect /ID Engineer same shall be executed by contractor
without any additional cost.

1.2 BASIC DESIGN

1.2.1 The equipment should be capable of operations under local ambient conditions.

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 ADDC Regulation

1.3.2 Codes:

ACB/MCCB BSEN 60947‐2&3,
BS 3871 part‐II, BS 4752
Switch board BS 61439 part‐I‐V
Switchboard degree of
Protection BS 5490
Degree of protection BS 5420
ELCB/RCCB BSEN 61008, BS 4293
MCC BS 5486
Distribution Boards BS 5486, BS 4649
Starters and Control Gears BS 5486
Electrical Motors BS 4999, BS 5000
Motor Insulation BS 2757
Fans BS 848 part I & II
Pumps BS 599
Control Panel Indication Lamps BS 4099
Bus Bars BS 158, BS 159
PVC insulated wiring cables
Non armoured 450/750
Grade BS 6004
PVC insulated Steel wire
Armoured PVC sheathed Cables
600/1000V grade BS 6346
XLPE insulated steel wire

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

Armoured PVC sheathed multicore

Cables 600/1000V grade BS 5467
XLPE insulated Aluminium wire
Armoured PVC sheathed single
Core cables BS 5467
Jointing Tapes BSS 633, BSS 3924
Fire resistant cables BS 4066 part‐I, BS 6360, BS 6899, BS 7629.1993
Flexible Cables BS 6004
Cables for general lighting &
Luminaries BS 4533
Cable trays BS 729
Switches BS 3676
Switch socket outlets BS 1363, BS 546
GI boxes BS 4662
DP switches/fuse conn. Units BS 5733, BS 3676, BS 1362
Cooker Control Units BS 4177
Cable Glands BS 4121
Lamp holders BS 98
Steel trunking BS 4678
Isolating transformers BS 3535
Ceiling roses BS 67
Protection against corrosion BS 1706
Single pole switches BS 3676
Distribution Units for
Building sites BS 4363
Distribution of Electricity
For Building sites CP 1017
Earthing and Lightning
Protections BS 6651 1999

1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

1.4.1 Clause 1.4 (This Clause) is intended to amplify the requirements of specification section 26 05
00 and is supplemental to 26 05 00. In the event of a discrepancy Clause 1.4 (This Clause) shall
prevail.

1.4.2 The Contractor shall produce a full set of working drawings showing the entire building services
installation in plan and section. These drawings shall be coordinated with the building structure,
the interior fit out works and all other Engineering services.

In addition, the Contractor shall produce dimensioned reflected ceiling plans to show all ceiling
mounted terminals. Terminal relationships with ceiling features shall be clearly indicated and
dimensioned. Dimensioned elevation drawings shall also be produced by the Contractor,
showing the location of all accessories, equipment and plant that are attached to or mounted
within walls.

The following details outline the information which the Contractor must provide during the
course of the contract to suit the master construction program.

1. Working drawings for all aspects of the installation.
2. Detailed design drawings and equipment schedules for specialist systems e.g. fire alarms,
voice alarms, emergency lighting, lighting controls, lightning protection, etc.
3. Backup calculation for all equipment like, cable size, battery size, cable tray sizing,
Earthing calculations, Voltage drop calculations, UPS calculations, DG set calculations,

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

central battery system calculations etc.

4. External ducting and cable routes.
5. Lightning protection requirements for structural detailing.
6. Builder’s work information for holes, plinths, chases, etc.
7. Setting out details and mounting heights.
8. Samples.
9. Site mark‐ups indicating installation details.

Record drawings, operating and maintenance manual, training documentation, log‐books,
schematics, mimic diagrams, co‐ordination drawings.

The Contractor is responsible for detailed builder’s work and coordination of wall and floor
penetrations through structure including dimensioned drawings showing coordinated setting
out. Include full coordination with all other contract packages on the project.

It is not acceptable for building services to be indicated on separate sheets on a service‐by‐
service basis, basis unless it can be clearly demonstrated that all services have been co‐
ordinated with each other.

The Contractor shall produce schematic drawings for each Engineering service. These shall be
based on the tender schematic drawings but shall identify the technical characteristics of the
plant and equipment selected by the Contractor.

All plant and equipment technical criteria shall be indicated and where it deviates by more than
–0% / +5% from that specified this deviation shall be highlighted on the drawing. The technical
criteria to be indicated shall include (list is not exhaustive).

 Motor ratings and motor efficiencies
 Fault current ratings
 Disconnection Time
 Protective device rating
 Cable length
 Voltage drop
 Earth Fault rating
 Component impedance
 AHU electrical power ratings
 Pump/ Fan Motor ratings, motor efficiencies, running and starting currents

1.4.3 Separate schematic drawings showing fire and life safety systems shall be prepared by the
Contractor for submission to the UAE fire regulation by the Contractor. Once approval is
achieved, these services shall be indicated on the above drawings.

The Contractor shall submit the number copies of every drawing (or subsequent revision) to the
Employer’s representative as indicated in the Employer’s Requirements.

1.4.4 Prior to submitting any drawings for approval the Contractor shall submit a comprehensive
drawing schedule to the Employer’s representative for approval.

The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s representative for approval two copies of each
material submittal for each and every component used on the project.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 6 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.4.5 Prior to submitting any material submittal for approval the Contractor shall submit a
comprehensive material submittal schedule to the Employer’s representative for approval. The
Contractor shall produce a comprehensive set of builder’s work drawings indicating all builder’s
work requirements associated with the Works described in this specification.

1.4.6 The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive set of “As Built” drawings showing the route,
location, size, capacity and technical characteristics of all building services systems. Four sets
shall be submitted to the Employer’s representative. Drawings for concealed services (e.g. above
ceilings, in riser shafts, buried in ground, etc.) shall be submitted two weeks before the services
are concealed. These drawings shall be produced with a level of detail as defined in BSRIA
22/97. As Built drawings and associated O&M manuals shall utilize the site wide referencing
system.

The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive set of Operating and maintenance instructions (3
sets). O&M manual content shall include: purpose and planning information, technical overview
narratives, technical documentation including record drawings, full operating instructions for
each system, detailed maintenance instructions for each system, schedules, parts lists,
modification instructions, disposal instructions and procedures and results of tests undertaken
during the commissioning process.

1.4.7 It should be noted that the plant and equipment referencing system indicated on the contract
documents is subject to change and a new site‐wide system will be introduced during the
construction period. The new system shall be incorporated into the as built drawings and
operating and maintenance instructions.

The Contractor shall provide hard copies & electronic copies of all documents and drawings
referred to in the above clauses in accordance with the Employer’s Requirements.

1.5 TRAINING AND MISCELLANEOUS

1.5.1 The Contractor shall train the Building User’s / Operator’s in the operation of the plant and
equipment. Training sessions shall be planned in advance and shall always comprise at least two
sessions per topic. All training sessions shall be recorded in HD quality and at least two videos
DVD’s of each training session shall be handed to the Employer’s representative along with two
copies of the presentation notes. Where appropriate training sessions shall be split between
classroom sessions and field workshops. Duration of training and number of copies of recording
shall be as per the Employer’s representative’s instruction and approval.

1.5.2 All Plant and equipment shall be clearly labeled using the site wide referencing system, which
shall be different to that indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.5.3 All systems, plant and equipment shall be identified on site in accordance with 26 05 53.

1.6 OFF LOADING, CARTAGE, STORAGE ETC.

1.6.1 The Contractor shall take delivery, offload, store in a safe location, carry / transport / lift to the
workface all materials required to undertake the Works.

1.6.2 Where necessary, the Contractor shall store materials in air conditioned storage to prevent
degradation by heat and / or corrosion. This shall apply to all components with a metallic
decorative finish liable to corrosion and to all components with electronic circuitry that is not
designed for external use. It shall also apply to all materials where the manufacturers
recommended storage conditions would be exceeded if stored in a non‐air‐conditioned store.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 7 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.7 COORDINATION

1.7.1 The Contractor shall co‐ordinate his works with the works of other services. Particular attention
shall be paid to interface with the interior design and the interior design drawings and the
subsequent interior design shop drawings shall form the basis of installation and co‐ordination
drawings prepared by the Contractor. Access to maintainable items through ceilings and wall
panels shall be addressed from the outset and access requirements clearly annotated on all
drawings. Finally, site surveys shall be conducted and any variations of the built form
incorporated into the final installation and coordination drawings.

1.7.2 Plant and equipment items indicated are based on specific manufacturers. However, it is
expected that Tenderers / Contractors will select alternative and equivalent or superior
products which may have dimensions that differ to that indicated. The Contractor shall take
such differences into account during the production of installation and coordination drawings
and any costs that arise from these differences shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.8 PRODUCTS

1.8.1 All references within this Specification to trade names of products, manufacturers and suppliers
are the requirement of the standard required under this Contract. If the Contractor is required
to submit alternative products and / or suppliers for approval, this must be notified with the
Tender. All products shall be supported by local agencies resident in the UAE who stock spare
parts and can provide technical support and who are also listed in the List of Approved
Manufacturers.

1.9 SOURCE INSPECTIONS

1.9.1 Allow for source inspections for LV panels, generators, bus bar trunking and any alternative
make for an Employer’s representative’s representative and a Client’s representative. Allow for
all expenses and business class airfares on journeys in excess of 3 hours flight time.

1.10 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.10.1 The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission and handover the complete electrical
services installations in accordance with the contract preliminaries and conditions and as
described within this specification, general technical preliminaries specification, and applicable
relevant sections of the standard specification for electrical Engineering services.

1.10.2 The scope of work shall comprise, but not limited to the following:

1. Incoming power supply

2. Main L V Switch panels
3. Sub Main distribution boards
4. Final Circuit distribution boards
5. L V distribution
6. Earthing and bonding systems
7. Power Factor Correction and harmonic mitigation
8. Electronic Surge Protection
9. Lightning protection system
10. All internal lighting and intelligent lighting control system
11. Emergency lighting system
12. Fire alarm system and voice evacuation system
13. Fireman’s telephone system

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 8 of 40
Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

14. General purpose small power and provision of hand dryers

15. Cable basket, ladder, tray, trunking and conduit installations
16. Supplies to lifts
17. Supplies to mechanical plant and associated control systems
18. Supplies to security and access control system
19. Facilities for telecom systems as per ETISALAT & DU regulations
20. Supplies and conduits for car park facilities
21. Testing, witness and commissioning handover
22. Operational and maintenance manuals
23. Training of employers and staff

1.10.3 All materials and equipment shall be new and manufactured under ISO 9000 or equivalent. If
this is not possible, products manufactured to the relevant British Standard will be accepted by
the Employer’s representative, subject to the Contractor providing detailed documentary
evidence that the former conditions cannot be satisfied.

1.10.4 The electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with the best international
standards and codes of practice specifically the current issue of the IEE regulations (BS 7671)
and the requirements of the local authorities – Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (ADDC), NFPA,
BS codes and Civil Defense Authority (CDA).

1.10.5 The Contractor shall provide, install and co‐ordinate all hangers, inserts, sleeves, supports,
brackets and foundation bolts etc. for the complete electrical installation. All metal supports,
screws, bolts or hardware shall be galvanized and the Contractor shall apply cold galvanizing
compound on all newly cut ferrous metal surface immediately after cutting. All supporting work
and fixing methods shall be appropriate to the building structure and shall be reviewed by the
Employer’s representative.

1.11 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS / OPERATING CONDITIONS

1.11.1 It is a requirement for all equipment, apparatus, materials and machines to be suitably rated for
the adverse ambient conditions in the UAE which are as follows:

Minimum ambient temperature ‐ 8 deg C winter
Maximum ambient temperature ‐ 50 deg C summer
Maximum relative humidity ‐ (RH) 100%

1.11.2 Precautions should also be taken to ensure the high saline content, in both the ambient air and
ground, does not have any adverse effect on the general operation of the plant, equipment or
materials used on the project.

1.12 INCOMING POWER SUPPLY / SUB STATION L.V. FACILITIES

1.12.1 The incoming 11kV power supply, H V ring main units and transformers will be provided by
ADDC and the Contractor shall include for all necessary facilities and co‐ordination with the
local authority and the external works Contractor to allow the HV incoming cables to be
installed into, and routed through the building.

PART‐2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Materials shall be new, of local manufacture where available, first quality and uniform
throughout. Submit tender based on the use of materials and equipment specified.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 9 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.1.2 Electrical materials shall be LOCAL AUTHORITY approved and be so labelled. Material not
LOCAL AUTHORITY approved shall receive acceptance for installation by LOCAL AUTHORITY
before delivery, and modifications and charges required for such acceptance shall be included in
work of this Section. Material shall not be installed or connected to the source of electrical
power until approval is obtained.

2.1.3 Confirm capacity, ratings and characteristics of equipment items being provided to supply
power to equipment provided under other Sections of the work. Resolve discrepancies before
such items are purchased.

2.2 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE

2.2.1 Acceptance of materials installed presumes that materials have not been damaged or exposed to
conditions that would adversely affect performance and life expectancy.

2.3 RACEWAYS

2.3.1 Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall comply with BS4568 Class 4.

2.3.2 Rigid PVC conduit shall comply with BS4607 Part 1.

2.4 WIRE & CABLE

The Contractor shall supply and install all wires and cables necessary for the complete Electrical
System, as required, and as specified herein.

2.4.1 SINGLE CORE WIRES CU/PVC TO IEC 227

2.4.1.1 This specification covers single core, PVC insulated wires, intended for internal wiring in dry
locations, concealed in conduits. Contractor shall provide LSF insulated wires, if required by
local authority.

2.4.1.2 Conductors shall be of high conductivity annealed plain copper with concentric stranded
conductors, to IEC 228.

2.4.1.3 Minimum conductor size used shall not be less than 2.5 mm2.

2.4.1.4 All wires for lighting and power systems pulled inside conduits shall be single core, insulated
with PVC compound, of grade not less than 300 / 500 volts, to IEC 227. The cables shall be
suitable for operation in the range of ‐25°C to +90°C.

2.4.1.5 Multicore Power Cables Cu/LSF/LSF and Cu/XLPE/LSF to IEC 60502 & BS 7671.

2.4.1.6 Power cables shall be used for supply of power to main distribution boards, secondary
distribution boards, pumps, HVAC equipment and all external lighting and equipment.

2.4.1.7 This specification covers single, two, three or four core cables, LSF or XLPE insulated and LSF
sheathed, rated at 600V/1000 V un‐armoured and armoured type.

2.4.1.8 Conductor shall be plain, annealed electrolytic copper, circular or sectorial stranded,
conforming to the applicable requirements of IEC 228.

2.4.1.9 The insulation shall be LSF or XLPE based (as per authority requirement) thermoplastic
material conforming to the applicable requirements of IEC 60502.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 10 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.4.1.10 The assembly shall consist of insulated conductors filled where necessary with
non‐hygroscopic material and covered with an additional layer of extruded thermoplastic
material or non‐hygroscopic binding tape.

2.4.1.11 The sheath shall be LSF based thermoplastic material, conforming to the applicable
requirements of IEC 60502.

Flexible cords for connection of fixtures to circuit‐wiring shall have finely stranded copper
Conductor with PVC insulation, 500 V grade.

2.4.2 FLEXIBLE CORDS

2.4.2.1 Cords used for water heater connections shall be of high conductivity tinned copper wires, (4
mm2 unless otherwise indicated) insulated with ethylene propylene rubber, three cores twisted
together, filled and sheathed with chloro sulphonated polyethylene (EPR CSP), 300/500 V rated,
and shall withstand an operating temperature of 90 °C.

2.4.2.2 Cords used for pendant lighting points and between 220 V / 12 V transformers to lighting
fixtures, shall be circular three core (2.5 mm2) silicon rubber insulated, glass fibre braided
300/500 V rated and shall withstand an operating temperature of 170 °C. Unconditioned area
and area with direct sunlight, rubber flexible cables to be used as per relevant IEC or BS
standards

2.4.2.3 Cords used for extract fans and fan coil units shall be of plain annealed copper conductor (2.5
mm2 unless otherwise indicated), PVC insulated, circular three cores twisted together, PVC
overall sheeted 300 / 500 V rated and shall withstand an operating temperature of 70 °C.

2.4.3 CONTROL CABLES

2.4.3.1 Control cables where used underground direct burial shall comprise stranded annealed copper
conductor of minimum 2.5 mm2 cross‐section insulated with high dielectric polyvinyl chloride,
nylon sheathed with a tape binder applied over the assembly, overall PVC jacketed Control
cables shall comply with IEC 502.

2.4.3.2 Number of conductors shall be equal to the maximum number of functions plus 20% spare.

2.4.3.3 Cable shall be 600 /1000V insulated and sheathed grade.

2.4.3.4 Junction boxes shall include all necessary terminal connector boards with proper labels.

2.4.3.5 Contractor shall make sure that the cross‐sectional areas of the conductors are sufficient to
cater for the voltage drop due to the long runs involved.

2.4.3.6 Control cables where used in ducts underground or in conduits above ground shall comprise
stranded annealed copper conductor of minimum 1.5 mm2 cross‐section for cables in ducts and
0.75 mm2 for cables in conduits insulated with high dielectric polyvinyl chloride, and PVC
sheathed. Control cables shall comply with IEC 502.

2.4.4 INSTALLATION OF WIRES & CABLES

2.4.4.1 All wires shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of the approved codes.

2.4.4.2 The Contractor shall install as many wires and conduits as required and necessary for a
complete electrical system, and shall provide adequately for the equipment actually to be
installed.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 11 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.4.4.3 Where more than one conductor is used per phase, each phase, neutral if any and ground wires
shall be run in each metallic or non‐metallic conduit.

2.4.4.4 Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except within
outlet or junction boxes.

2.4.4.5 At every outlet and pull box, wires and cables passing through shall be left slack by an amount
equivalent to 20 cm of cable length to allow inspection and connection to be made therein.

2.4.4.6 No cable bend shall have a radius of less than eight times its diameter.

2.4.4.7 All conductors to be contained within a single conduit shall be drawn in at the same time.

2.4.4.8 A wire pulling compound shall be applied to conductors being drawn through conduit. Pulling
compound shall be soap tone or other approved material.

2.4.4.9 Only cables forming part of a lift installation if any may be run in a lift shaft.

2.4.4.10 Wires and cables for feeders, sub‐feeders, control, and branch circuit wiring shall be colour
coded as per ADDC regulations.

2.4.4.11 Unless otherwise indicated, no conductor for lighting and power wires shall be smaller than 2.5
mm2.

2.4.4.12 All branch circuits for internal lighting and appliances shall be single conductor cables run
inside conduits, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4.4.13 Feeder and sub‐feeders shall be multi‐conductor cables run exposed on cable trays or in
underground ducts.

2.4.4.14 Single cables unless otherwise specified, could be fixed directly to walls or ceilings. Where 2 or
more cables are run in parallel, they shall be fixed on hot dip galvanized steel perforated trays
or other approved special cable supporting and protecting arrangement.

2.4.4.15 Cables shall be fixed to supporting structures with approved hot dip galvanized cast steel
clamps at distances not exceeding 20 diameters.

2.4.4.16 No joints or splices shall be accepted on main feeders.

2.4.5 IDENTIFICATION OF WIRES & CABLES

2.4.5.1 Identification scheme shall be as required by British Standards and Local ADDC Regulations as a
minimum.

2.4.5.2 Individual conductor or circuit identification shall be carried throughout, with circuit numbers
or other identification clearly installed on terminal boards and printed on directory cards in
distribution cabinets and panel boards.

2.4.5.3 In junction boxes, cabinets, and terminal boxes where the total number of control, indicating,
and metering wires is three or fewer and no terminal board is provided, each wire including all
power wires, shall be properly identified by means of a plastic, wire marker.

2.4.5.4 Wires including motor leads and other power wires too large for connection to the terminal
boards shall be identified by wire markers as specified above.

2.4.5.5 In manholes, hand holes, pull boxes, junction boxes and at both terminals each cable shall be
properly identified by a plastic tag located so as to be easily seen.
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 12 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.4.6 CONNECTORS AND TERMINAL BLOCKS

2.4.6.1 For the wiring of circuits consisting of wire sizes 35 mm2 and smaller such as for lighting,
branch circuits etc…, no any splices or joints allowed. Where flexible cables are used from
ceiling outlet box to recessed lighting fixtures, plug in type ceiling roses only shall be utilized.

2.4.6.2 For the wiring of circuits consisting of wire sizes 50 mm2 and larger, connectors shall be of the
bolted pressure type, with a pre‐insulated sleeve shall be used.

2.4.6.3 Connectors shall be manufactured from high conductivity electrolytic copper with soft tin‐lead
plating (Sn60Pb40).

2.4.6.4 Connector bodies shall be manufactured from Polyamide (Nylon 6.6).

2.4.7 CABLE GLANDS

2.4.7.1 Cable glands shall be provided at the termination of all cables at the enclosure of a distribution
board or any other equipment.

2.4.7.2 Cable glands shall be indoor or outdoor type, ordinary or weatherproof according to the location
of the termination and the installation standard and to the approval of the Employer’s
representative.

2.4.8 FIRE RATED CABLES

2.4.8.1 Fire resistant cable 600/1000 Volts rated, for use where fire resistance, flame retardance and
low smoke and corrosive gas emission properties are required.

2.4.8.2 It shall provide uninterrupted power supply and preserve circuit integrity in the event of fire.

2.4.8.3 “X” x CSA mm2, plain or stranded Copper, Mica/Glass tape, cross‐linked insulation and LSOH
sheath overall; rated 600/1000V.

2.4.9 FIRE RESISTANCE/LOW SMOKE

2.4.9.1 The cable shall meet the requirements of IEC331 and BS6387 for categories C, W and Z (950°C
for 3 hours, water spray test and mechanical shock test).

2.4.9.2 When the complete cable is tested in accordance with BS7622 Pt 2 (IEC1034‐2) it shall meet the
minimum light transmittance requirements as stated in BS7622 Pt 2 (IEC 1034‐2).

2.4.9.3 When tested in accordance with BS6425 Pt 1 (IEC754‐1), all non‐metallic components shall give
a level of HCI not greater than 0.5%.

2.4.10 FLAME RETARDANCE

The cable shall meet the requirements of BS4066 Pt 1 (IEC332 ‐1) and comply with BS6387
categories “Flame Retardant”.

2.4.11 CERTIFICATION

The cable shall be certified by an approved authority to comply with the standards and
requirements listed herein.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 13 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.4.12 CONSTRUCTION CONDUCTORS

1.0 mm2 to 630 mm2. Plain copper stranded circular conductor complying with BS6360 Class
2.

2.4.13 INSULATION

Mica/Glass Fire Resistant tape, covered by an extruded cross‐linked insulation, complying with
BS7655 type GP8 or type GP6, operating temperature 90°C. The cross‐linked insulation shall
prevent thermoplastic flow and give high short circuit withstand ratings.

2.4.14 CORE IDENTIFICATION

Cores shall be identified as follows:

Single core black or red
2 core black, red
3 core red, yellow, blue.
4 core red, yellow, blue, black.
7+ core white with black printed numbers.
Sheath
Abrasion resistant extruded LSOH sheath complying with BS7655 type LTS4.
Sheath colour
Orange.
Sheath Marking
Marked as follows:
Fire Rated Cable LSOH “X” x CSA ELECTRIC CABLE 600/1000V

2.4.15 INSTALLATION

Cables should be installed in accordance with the appropriate regulations including IEC 364, IEE
Wiring Regulations or any other national regulations.

Range and Availability

Single core 1.0 ‐ 630mm2
2 core 1.0 ‐ 300mm2
3 core 1.0 ‐ 300mm2
4 core 1.0 ‐ 300mm2
7, 12, 19, 27 & 37 core 1.0 ‐ 2.5mm2
Temperature Limits
The cables shall be suitable for operation in the range of ‐25°C to +90°C.

2.4.16 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The cables shall be manufactured under a strict Quality Management System that is certified to
meet the requirements of ISO 9001.

N.B.: all equipment dedicated for life safety such as staircases air pressurization fans, parking
smoke management fans, fire pumps, elevators, firefighting systems, voice evacuation systems,
fire alarm and detection system, emergency lighting and emergency motors/pumps shall be
wiring using fire rated cables.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 14 of 40
Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.5 DEVICES

2.5.1 Wiring devices unless otherwise specified herein, or noted, shall be as per approved vendor
/manufactured list.

2.6 DEVICE SPECIALIZED

2.6.1 Contactors controlling lighting loads shall be enclosed mechanically held, electrically operated,
in suitable enclosure of the sizes and types indicated. Contactors shall be complete with coil
clearing contacts and control transformers as necessary for control by time switch (or
pushbutton) as specified and detailed.

2.7 DEVICE COVER PLATES

2.7.1 Switch and receptacle and other device faceplates for flush mounted devices, generally shall be
single or multi‐gang as required with removable protective covering.

2.7.2 The finish of cover plates shall be metallic in the commercial kitchen, laundry, common corridor
and plant rooms and White plastic in all other areas as approved by the Employer’s
representative.

2.7.3 The local switches shall be 16 amp grid type with Circuit switches shall be one‐way, two‐way,
intermediate or double pole. Where more than one switch is indicated at any position multiple
gang units shall be used with 500V phase barrier inside.

2.7.4 Switches shall be of the quick start make, slow break type specially designed for AC circuits. All
the switches to have provision for hidden diode kit for location and power indication.

2.7.5 For flush mounting switches the switch‐plate shall overlap all edges of the box by not less than
7mm. For surface mounting switches the switch plate shall finish flush with the edges of the
switch boxes. Switches for water heaters and fan coil units shall be 20 amp, double pole type,
complete with neon indicator lights & identification.

2.7.6 In plant rooms the switch units shall be surface or flush as required.

2.7.7 Local switches shall be arranged in convenient positions for switching the various circuits.
Provision to be included so that the switches are position indicative.

2.7.8 Weatherproof enclosures for outdoor receptacles shall be approved equal, gasketed double lift
cover.

2.7.9 Cover plates for other devices such as flush fan controls, telephone, etc., shall be as per
Employer’s representative’s approval.

2.7.10 Sockets more than 5 nos. shall be connected in ring circuits.

2.7.11 The switch socket outlets shall be assembled in single or multiple units in G.I boxes. All boxes
shall be supplied with 2nos. adjustable steel grids and earthing terminals.

2.7.12 Telephone outlets shall be flush mounted type. These shall be of the same make and finish of the
adjacent socket outlets. Master and slave tel. Socket shall be installed as per Telephone
Department requirements.

2.7.13 Back boxes shall be provided with brass earth terminal to facilitate earth wire connection. The
boxes to have sufficient number of 20mm and 25mm knockout and shall comply with relevant

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 15 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

codes. Boxes shall have two adjustable lugs for proper installations of wiring accessories.
Extension ring shall be used along with G.I boxes, in places where the box is deep inside the
wall, marble or concrete.

2.7.14 DP Switches shall be of flush or surface mounting type. The fuse connection units shall
incorporate integral switch, neon indicator and 13A fuse links. When the 20A DP switches are
used to connect air handling units and water heaters, these shall be supplied with an integral
switch and a flexible outlet. These shall be of the same manufacturer for a particular type of
switch throughout the installation and shall be complete with the other accessories installed.
The choice of plate finishes will be in accordance with the Employer’s representative’s
instructions.

2.7.15 Mounting Heights

The mounting heights for the electrical equipment and accessories shall be co‐ordinated
equipment layout and shall be as per site requirements. Employer’s representative’s approval
shall be taken before starting fixing of the back boxes. The following heights may be followed for
general purpose:

1. Switches and fire alarm Break glass : 1250mm FFL
2. Switch socket outlets/telephone/TV outlets : 450mm FFL
3. Fire Alarm Control Panel/DBs : 1800mm FFL(Top)
4. Isolators for FCU : Adjacent to Unit
5. Flexible outlet for Water Heater/Other equipment : Adjacent to Unit
6. Isolators/DP Switch for Hand Driers : Above false ceiling

2.7.16 Colour code for all wiring accessories in workshop area, Single phase socket outlets‐ Blue &
Three phase socket outlets – Red

2.8 MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD (MDB) OR LOW VOLTAGE (LV) PANEL – FORM 4 TYPE 6

The main LV Switchboard shall be of a free standing, cubicle type modular construction system
conforming to fully type tested designs, incorporating ACB's, MCCB's Busbars, fuses, measuring
equipment etc. all as required and complying to the latest editions of BS EN 61439‐1‐5. The
switchboard shall be from a reputed manufacturer with an established and IEC 439 ‐ 1 certified
quality assurance system to ISO 9001. Non certified manufacturers would not be accepted.

All circuit breakers and Busbars should be rated for 50°C. All auxiliary power supplies shall be
provided as per the manufacturer's requirement.

2.8.1 Design & Construction:

2.8.1.1 Switchboard construction shall be designed to FORM 4 standards for panels in accordance with
IEC 61439‐1/ BS EN 61439‐1‐5. Busbars shall be in a separate chamber, fully segregated from
the rest of the switchboard. Additional insulating material shall be provided behind the
doors/plates of the busbar chamber. Individual functional units shall be located in independent
compartments.

2.8.1.2 In addition to compliance with FORM 4 standards, the switchboard shall be successfully tested
for safe containment of an internal arcing fault. Suitable ducts and vents for individual
functional units and busbars shall be incorporated in the switchboard to safely divert the
resultant over pressure and arcing away from the operator and adjacent functional units.
Allowing the gases to escape through the door into the cable way or out the back of the board
will not be acceptable. Any system without Arc test Certificate shall not be proposed.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 16 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.8.1.3 The switchboard shall be of a modular construction and be extendable on both sides. Welded
construction switchboards will not be accepted. The degree of protection shall be at least IP 44
as defined in IEC 529.

2.8.1.4 Enclosures shall be made of sheet steel. The basic framework should be roll‐formed to 2mm
electro‐galvanised steel coated with high‐solid enamel, polyester electrostatic spray and oven
baked. The doors and panels shall be iron‐phosphate steel, coated like the framework but also
with primer. The color shall beRAL 7032 (light gray) or equal. The base frame shall be of
minimum 3mm thick Electro galvanized steel.

2.8.1.5 Compartments shall be easily accessible for maintenance purposes. Barriers shall be included
between each compartment to contain an internal fault as defined in BS / IEC standards to
ensure safe maintenance on any outgoing circuit when the remainder of the board is alive. Each
compartment shall be provided with a separately fixed compartment thermostat controlled
heater at the bottom of each compartment.

2.8.1.6 The maximum height of the enclosure shall be 2400 mm. All meters, lamps, operating handles
shall be within a maximum height of 2000 mm. All dimensions shall be of uniform appearance.
All live conductors shall be shielded in such a manner that they cannot be accidentally touched
when the doors are open. All doors and plates shall be interchangeable and may be hinged left,
right, top and bottom as standard. Doors shall be provided with an integral gasket and earth
stud and a range of locks to meet all regulations.

2.8.1.7 All internal separations shall be from standard pre‐fabricated plates. The sage of Bakelite, fiber
sheets or any other material to provide internal separation will not be acceptable. The internal
separation between compartments and sections shall be at least IP 40.

2.8.1.8 Suitable cableways shall be provided for each functional unit section. There shall be front access
for cabling purposes. It shall be possible to safely terminate or work on the outgoing cables of
any functional unit without having to switch off the main breaker or adjacent functional units.
Switchboards shall be suitable for bottom or top cable entry as specified. All openings and
entries shall be vermin proof. Switchboards shall be arranged such that safe access (front, rear,
side) may be readily obtained. Adjustable gland plates, adequate channel frames and cable
clamps for cable supports shall be provided.

2.8.1.9 Contractor shall provide containment with wiring and junction boxes for ADDC Intelligent
metering system as per ADDC regulations.

2.8.2 Panel wiring / Terminal Blocks / Labels:

2.8.2.1 All internal and control wiring shall be 600 / 1000V PVC insulated stranded copper cable to BS
6231. All cables shall be adequately rated and not less than 2.5 sq.mm. run on PVC cables trays.
Each cable shall be properly terminated at both ends with loops. When wiring is across door
hinges, it shall be enclosed by flexible PVC tubing and be looped to permit the opening of doors
and removal of components for inspection. Plastic ferrules with correct numbers shall be fitted
on all wires to correspond with circuit number and diagram.

2.8.2.2 Terminal blocks for power and control wiring shall be of Cage Clamp connection technique in
which the only tool required is a flat – bladed screwdriver .Once he conductor is inserted ,the
stainless steel cage clamp shall automatically provide the correct clamping force for a secure
connection. Screws terminals shall not be used. Cables having the same number shall be
terminated at adjacent terminals and connected by means of cable jumpers at the terminal
block. Terminal blocks shall be grouped according to the working voltage, power circuit and
control circuit. 10% of spare terminals and not less than two numbers shall be provided on each
group of terminal block.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 17 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.8.2.3 All Circuit breakers, Feeders' etc. shall be provided with labels of adequate dimensions. Labels
shall be of traffolyte having a white background engraved letters. They shall be screws fixed on
the panel.

2.8.3 Metering and indication:

2.8.3.1 The Mains supply incomer should be provided with ammeter, a voltmeter and RYB phase
indication lamps. KWH meter shall be provided and shall be of an approved type and make by
the utility.

2.8.3.2 Indicating lamps shall be of the long life LED. They shall be connected through individually fused
circuits tapped from the outgoing side of the main switch.

2.8.3.3 Internal and auxiliary wiring shall be of the 600/1000V grade with a minimum cross section of
2.5‐sq. mm.

2.8.3.4 BMS compatible PMU's shall be provided for major loads for ESTIDAMA Pearl two minimum
requirements.

2.8.4 Tests:

The main distribution board and the components as applicable shall be tested in accordance
with the IEC standards to verify the specified fault level withstand capacity from a reputed and
approved type testing laboratory and certified by an competent authority.

2.8.4.1 Following type test shall be carried out at recognized test laboratories and certificates from
approved test witnessing authority shall be provided for each type test.

1) Verification of temperature rise limit
2) Verification of the dielectric properties.
3) Verification of short circuit withstanding strength.
4) Verification of the effectiveness of the protective circuit.
5) Verification of clearance and creepage distance.
6) Verification of degree of protection.
7) Mechanical operation.

2.8.4.2 The panels shall undergo the following tests in the factory before despatch:

a) Primary Injection Test for all Circuit Breakers.
b) Secondary Test for all protective relays and meters, CT polarity tests.
c) Mill volt Drop Test
d) HV Test 2.5kV for 1 min.
e) Insulation test
f) Function Test

These tests shall be carried out in presence of the Employer’s representative.

2.8.5 Drawings and Information:
A drawing pouch / pocket shall be provided in each panel and laminated load schedules and
approved schematic drawings (Framed) shall be providing.

The vendor shall furnish following submittal after placement of order:

i) General Arrangement drawing showing front view, plan, foundation plan ,floor cutouts

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 18 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

and trenches for external cables , elevations, transport sections and weights.
ii) Sectional drawings of various types of feeders, panels showing general constructional
features, mounting details of various devices, busbars, current transformers, cable boxes,
terminal boxes for control cables etc.
iii) Schematic and control wiring diagrams for each type of feeder and protection including
indicating devices, metering instruments, alarms, space heaters etc.
iv) Terminal plan showing terminal numbers, ferrule markings ,device terminal numbers,
functions etc. and
v) Control wiring diagrams.

Vendor shall provide a copy of the above drawings for approval and a copy of the as built
drawings for records.

The information furnished shall include the following:

i) Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.
ii) Erection, Operation and maintenance manual complete with all relevant information,
drawings and literature for auxiliary equipment and accessories, characteristics for relays
etc.
iii) An equipment list with detailed specifications and make.

2.8.6 Provision for spare feeder to be considered in each LV panel for future connection of active
harmonic filters.

2.9 SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD (SMDB) FORM 2 TYPE 2:

Sub main panel boards should be provided with minimum 2 no. pad locks with locks and key.

2.9.1 The panel board shall be Wall mounting type constructed to BS EN 61439, Form2 requirements.
It shall be constructed of minimum 1.6mm thick electro‐galvanised steel coated with high solid
enamel polyester electrostatic spray and oven baked. The colour shall be RAL 7032 (light grey).
Doors locks shall be fitted. The degree of protection of the board shall be IP44 inside elec. room,
IP54 inside Plant room & IP65 for exposed area.

2.9.2 Busbars shall be of hard drawn, high conductivity tinned copper and rated for continues
operation. The phase bar, neutral bar and earth bar shall be identified by approved colour
codes. The neutral bar shall be of the same cross section as the phase bus bar. A sub feed neutral
assembly with a removable link for isolation shall be available as an integral part of the
Distribution board. Earthing bar assembly shall also be available to facilitate the connection of
earth continuity conductors.

2.9.3 All Circuit breakers, Metering and Busbar ratings shall be as per the load schedules and
drawings. The main MCCB and the feeder breakers shall be of appropriate capacity.

2.9.4 Panel wiring, Terminal blocks and labels shall be as specified for the Main Distribution Boards.

2.9.5 Tests to be conducted on the SMDB before dispatch and the Drawings to be furnished are the
same as specified for Main Distribution Boards.

2.9.6 Wall mounted SMDB shall be fixed on a U – channel support, and not direct to the wall.

2.9.7 Space and provision should be provided in SMDB’s to add third harmonic filters in future
without switching off the panel.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 19 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.9.8 BMS compatible PMU's shall be provided in each SMDB's.

2.10 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (DB):

2.10.1 General lighting and power distribution boards shall be 600 volts grade metal‐clad pattern pre‐
treatment galvanized sheet steel rigid welded construction with minimum 1.2mm thick and
shall be supplied complete with panel door, phase barriers, masking plates, earth terminal bar,
miniature circuit‐breakers or cartridge fuses and circuits charts. All distribution boards shall be
manufactured under license.

2.10.2 Distribution boards intended to be installed in plant areas shall be of weatherproof industrial
type construction, and those intended to be installed in office and warehouse areas shall be
appearance suitable for installation these type of project. Both types shall be provided with top
and bottom removable metal gland plates which shall be drilled to suit cable glands or conduit
entry. Spare holes shall be provided, two each at top and bottom, and fitted with 32mm
stopping plugs and lock nuts.

2.10.3 Each distribution board shall be clearly labelled indicating its service and all 3‐phase
distribution boards shall be fitted with white labels red engraved DANGER‐and the appropriate
3‐phase voltage. Circuit charts shall indicate phasing, connected load and circuit breaker or fuse
rating. Single phase boards shall include phase colour identification discs.

2.10.4 One earth terminal shall be provided for each earth cable terminated.

Each distribution board shall be fitted with phase barriers of an oil and fire resisting insulating
material whereby it is not readily possible for personnel to touch the phase busbars. Insulating
barriers shall be fitted around the circuit breakers such that only the front surface and toggle of
the circuit breakers are showing.

Each distribution boards shall be fitted with a card index of circuits contained in a suitable
plastic pocket secured on the inside of the door panel.

2.10.5 Distribution boards shall be fitted with an integral incoming on‐load switch. All distribution
boards shall be fitted with a neutral busbar having facilities for terminating as many neutral
cables as single‐phase ways in the board. Neural bar terminations shall reflect the circuits
served, circuit No.1 in Terminal No. 1,
Each distribution board shall be fitted with an earth stud located in an accessible position. All
metal parts of the board except carrying parts shall be bonded together electrically and to the
earth busbar. The Short Circuit rating of the final MCBs shall be as per ADDC and latest IEC
regulations.

2.11 STANDBY GENERATORS

2.11.1 A standby generator will be installed to supply the building’s essential electrical services.

2.11.2 The works associated with the standby generation plant, associated controls and distribution
form part of the scope of works.

2.12 HIGH RUPTURING CAPACITY (HRC) FUSES

2.12.1 Fuses of the HRC type shall be provided and be such that the fuse carrier is easily withdrawable
for replacement of the fuse. All fuses shall be fitted with a visual device to indicate that the fuse
has operated.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 20 of 40

 Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.12.2 Time/Current characteristics of all fuse links shall be provided when requested by the
Employer’s representative.

2.12.3 The current rating of fuse links shall be of sufficient capacity to afford short‐circuit protection
for the loads as stated in the schedules forming part of the Specification whilst remaining
inoperative for such transient currents that may occur in the circuit. The rating where
applicable, shall be such that the characteristic of the fuse link matches the characteristic of any
contactor thermal device in the circuit.

2.13 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

2.13.1 Circuit breakers shall be draw‐out type with electronic trip units. Circuit breakers shall have
interrupting, close and latch, and 30‐cycle withstand ratings that meet the application
requirements. Interrupting rating shall be available up to 130 kA RMS amperes without fuses.
Close and latch ratings to 65 kA available on all frame sizes. Thirty‐cycle withstand rating
available up to 100 kA to provide maximum coordination with downstream circuit breakers.
Circuit breakers shall be available in 3200 A frame sizes. An adjustable rating plug (range of 0.4‐
1 times the sensor plug value) and a field‐replaceable sensor plug (available in standard
amperage steps from 50% to 100% of the frame size) shall determine the ampere rating of the
circuit breaker.

2.13.2 Circuit Breakers:

2.13.2.1 Circuit breaker shall be draw‐out type electrically operated.

2.13.2.2 The case of the circuit breaker shall be a polyester thermo set material providing high
dielectric strength.

2.13.2.3 All circuit breaker operating mechanisms are to be two‐step, fully‐ stored energy devices for
quick‐make, quick‐break operation with a maximum of a five‐cycle closing time. Open‐close‐
open (O‐C‐O) cycle shall be possible without recharging. Motor operator shall automatically
charge when circuit breaker is closed. Actuation of the operating handle or an operation cycle
of the circuit breaker motor is to charge the closing springs (step one) and operation of a local
"close" button is to close the circuit breaker contact (step two). Closing the circuit breaker
contacts shall automatically charge the opening springs.

2.13.2.4 Current‐carrying components shall be completely isolated from the accessory mounting area
and double insulated from the operator with accessory cover in place.

2.13.2.5 Each phase inside the circuit breaker shall be completely isolated from other phases and
ground by polyester thermoset material.

2.13.2.6 Padlocking provisions shall be furnished to receive up to three padlocks when circuit breaker
is in the disconnected position, positively preventing unauthorized closing of the circuit
breaker contacts.

2.13.2.7 Provisions for up to two key locks shall be furnished allowing locking in the disconnected
position. Provisions for locking in the connected, test and disconnected positions by padlock or
key lock shall be available as a option.

2.13.2.8 Located on the face of the circuit breaker shall be buttons, with optional lockable clear cover,
to open and close the circuit breaker and indicators to show the position of the circuit breaker
contacts, status of the closing springs, and circuit breaker position in the cell. An indicator shall
show "charged‐not OK to close" if closing springs are charged but circuit breaker is not ready
to close. Circuit breaker racking system must have positive stops at the connected, test,

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 21 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

disconnected and withdrawn positions.

2.13.2.9 Circuit breaker must be equipped with an interlock to discharge the stored energy spring
before the circuit breaker can be withdrawn from its cell. Circuit breaker must provide a
positive ground contact check between the circuit breaker and cell when the accessory cover is
removed while the circuit breaker is in the connected, test or disconnected positions.

2.13.2.10 Primary connectors that can be rotated to provide flexible vertical or horizontal connections
shall be available as an option. Front connections shall also be available for shallow depth
equipment designs.

2.13.2.11 Ready‐to‐close contact must be available to indicate remotely that the circuit breaker is "ready
to close." The circuit breaker is ready to close when it is open, spring mechanism is
charged, a maintained closing order is not present, a maintained opening order is not present,
and the circuit breaker is in an operational position.

2.13.2.12 Secondary wiring shall be front accessible and available in cage clamp or ring terminal
connections. Secondary wiring must not be accessible when switchgear door is closed.

2.13.2.13 Circuit breaker shall provide long service life. The 3200 A circuit breaker frame and those of
lower ratings must be certified to perform a minimum of 10,000 operations without
maintenance. The 4000 A and 5000 A frames must be certified to 5,000 operations
without maintenance.

2.13.2.14 Circuit breaker shall be equipped with a visual contact wear indicator.

2.13.2.15 Low‐voltage power circuit breaker arc chutes containing asbestos will NOT be accepted.

2.13.3 Trip System:

2.13.3.1 Circuit breaker trip system shall be an electronic trip unit. Trip unit shall be with LED screen
display.

2.13.3.2 Electronic trip unit shall be UL Listed as field‐replaceable and upgradeable without special
adjustments to the mechanism.

2.13.3.3 Electronic trip unit is to be true RMS current sensing

2.13.3.4 Trip unit functions shall consist of adjustable long‐time pickup and delay, optional short‐time
pickup and delay, instantaneous, optional neutral protection and optional ground‐fault pickup
and delay.

2.13.3.5 Adjustable long‐time pickup (Ir) and delay shall be available in an adjustable rating plug that is
UL Listed as field‐replaceable. Adjustable rating plug shall allow for nine long‐time pickup
settings from 0.4‐1 times the sensor plug (In). Other adjustable rating plugs shall be available
for more precise settings to match the application. Long‐time delay settings shall be in nine
bands from 0.5‐24 seconds at six times Ir.

2.13.3.6 Short‐time pickup shall allow for nine settings from 1.5‐10 times Ir. Short‐time delay shall be
in nine bands from 0.1‐0.4 I2t ON and 0‐0.4 I2t OFF.

2.13.3.7 Instantaneous settings on the trip units with LSI protection shall be available in nine bands
from 2‐15 times In. Instantaneous setting shall also have an OFF setting.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 22 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.13.3.8 All trip units shall have the capability for the adjustments to be set and read locally by rotating
a switch. Optional trip units shall have the capability to electronically adjust the settings to fine
increments below the switch settings. Fine increments for pickup adjustments are to be one
ampere. Fine increments for delay adjustments are to be one second.

2.13.3.9 Ground‐fault protection shall be available for solidly grounded three‐phase, three‐wire or
three‐phase, four‐wire systems. Trip unit shall be capable of the following types of ground‐
fault protection: residual, source ground return, and modified differential. Ground‐fault
sensing systems may be changed in the field.

2.13.3.10 Ground‐fault settings for circuit breaker sensor sizes 1200 A or below shall be in nine bands
from 0.2‐1.0 times in the ground‐fault settings for circuit breakers above 200 A shall be nine
bands from 500 to 1200 A.

2.13.3.11 Neutral current transformers shall be available for four‐wire systems.

2.13.3.12 Trip unit shall provide local trip indication and capability to indicate local and remote
reason for trip, e.g., overload, short circuit or ground fault. Trip unit shall be with LED screen
display.

2.13.3.13 Trip units shall be capable of communicating on MODBUS® networks.

2.13.3.14 Trip units shall be available to provide additional protection by offering adjustable inverse
definite minimum time lag (IDMTL). IDMTL provides optimized coordination by the
adjustment of the slope of the long‐time delay protection.

2.13.3.15 Trip units shall be available to provide real time metering. Metering functions include current,
voltage, power and frequency.

2.14 MOULDED CASE AND MINIATURE CIRCUIT‐BREAKERS

2.14.1 Circuit‐breakers shall be moulded case all insulated pattern with silver tungsten contacts and
quick make break trip‐free mechanism.

It shall be mounted in sheet steel boxes of approved design and where several breakers are
grouped together they shall be housed in metal enclosures similar in design to cubicle Switch
boards.

Wherever miniature circuit‐breakers provide final circuit protection they shall be grouped in
metal enclosed distribution boards.

Miniature circuit‐breakers shall be hydraulic magnetic or thermal magnetic type and each
circuit‐breaker shall carry its full rated current continuously, without tripping out, in the
enclosure specified. The calibration of the magnetic‐hydraulic trip mechanism shall not be
affected by ambient temperature variations.

2.14.2 Three‐pole type circuit‐breakers shall be so designed that the operation of the protective device
in any one phase shall cause opening of all three phases. All three loads shall be controlled by
three‐pole type circuit‐breakers. Circuit‐breakers shall have thermal‐magnetic overload short‐
circuit protection for less than 250A and electronics overload protection for 250A and above
rating. The characteristics of the protective devices and the associated HRC fuse feeding the
circuit‐breaker distribution board shall be such that for all current in excess of the maximum
capability of the circuit‐breaker, a time not less than 0.01 seconds shall exist between the
maximum fusing time of the HRC fuses and the minimum time of operation of the circuit‐
breakers at that particular value of current. They shall confirm to BS 3871 Part2, with a short
circuit rating as appropriate to the point of installation.
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 23 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.15 CONTACTORS

2.15.1 Contactors shall be of the air‐break type fitted with arc shields and be mechanically latched or
electrically held in. All essential process drives for safe running or shutdown of the service will
be controlled by contactors of the mechanically latched type. Only non‐essential drives will
utilise electrically held in contactors. Type of contactor shall be AC3 only.

The closing coil of mechanical latched contactors shall be suitable for operation from the D.C
power supply specified but shall operate satisfactory, with a coil temperature of 50C, over a
voltage range of 80‐120% of nominal voltage.

The operating coil for electrically held in contactors shall be suitable for operation on the
nominal single phase A.C supply but must be capable of satisfactory operating if the voltage is
80% of its nominal value. Electrically held in contactors shall hold in at a voltage of 76% of their
nominal value.

2.15.2 Unless otherwise specified, operating coils shall be suitable for single phase A.C supply an
switching facilities but fitted with rectified D.C coil and separate fuse for the control circuit.

2.15.3 The shunt trip release coil of mechanically latched contactors shall be suitable for operation
from the D.C power supply specified but shall operate satisfactorily, with a coil temperature of
50C over a voltage range of 80‐120% of nominal voltage.

But contacts of the rolling self‐cleaning type shall preferably be utilised and all portions likely to
suffer from arcing shall be easily removable. If rocker type contactors are used, they shall be
fitted with electro‐magnetic arc control devices.

The nominal current rating of a contactor for direct start motor drives shall not be less than
120% of the nominal full load current of the motor. Minimum current rating of contactors shall
be 30 amps.

2.16 MCC (MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES.)

2.16.1 The Contractor shall supply the motor control centres and suitable for mounting indoors and
with IP55 protection and shall be designed for an ambient temperature of 50C unless
otherwise stated. The motor control centres (MCCs) shall be in the form of floor‐mounted,
robust, rust‐proof sheet steel cubicles, Form‐4, type‐6 construction for all VFD panels, MCC
panels with 50.00 kW and above connected load, dust and damp proof protected unless
otherwise stated anywhere else in Specification.

2.16.2 Each cubicle shall be clearly marked with labels. The MCCs and distribution boards shall be
subdivided into sections being fully screened (separated) from its neighbour. Provision shall be
made for front access both for installation and maintenance unless otherwise stated and for
cable installation with the board live.

Incoming and outgoing cables shall be top or bottom entry. All motor starters shall be of the
‘direct‐on‐line’ type up to 5KW and star delta star above unless otherwise stated in the
particular specification. Cable entry for all panels shall be from the bottom, subject to engineer’s
acceptance.

The busbars shall be mounted at the top of the MCCs. The busbars for the motor control centre
are to be for 3 phase and neutral and are to be 98% pure electrolytic copper of the stated
capacity. The fault level of the busbars, droppers and associated apparatus shall be suitable for
50kA for 1 second unless otherwise specified.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 24 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

The bus bars shall not be graded and shall be capable of future extension at either end.

Where busbars are accessible, they shall be insulated to prevent accidental contact. The busbar
systems offered shall carry A.S.T.A certification.

2.16.3 All control circuits shall be 24V AC with isolation transformers.

2.16.4 Unless otherwise specified the motor starter units shall be arranged in multi‐tier assemblies. All
starters shall be readily accessible for maintenance and replacements of parts.

2.16.5 The Contractor shall supply drawings and diagrams.

2.16.6 Each Starter shall comprise, as a minimum :

a. Each starter shall be fitted with transformer operated lamps for indication as per NFPA
79:‐
Motor running (green)
Motor stopped (red)
Overload tripped (amber)
b. Each starter shall be fitted with one set of local start/stop push buttons and a
local/remote, or local/remote/auto selector switch, if required.
c. Each starter to be equipped with labels giving drive designation, plant number and
control operation.
d. Provision for padlocking the isolator in the ‘OFF’ position.
e. One control circuit MCB fuse and one copper link.
f. External mechanical hand reset to be provided.
g. All instruments shall have compatible appearance size and finish.
h. Ammeters and voltmeters shall be provided on incoming feeder and shall be flush
mounted.
i. All motor over 10KW shall be provided with ammeter and selector switch.
j. On‐load triple pole isolator with two normally open and one normally closed auxiliary
switch. The isolator to be mechanically interlocked with the starter component door and
capable of breaking the motor shall current and of making onto a fault at the motor
terminals.
k. Moulded case circuit breaker.
l. One triple pole thermal over‐current relay incorporating over‐current and single phase
protection with adjustable trip settings.
m. Each starter control wiring terminal block shall include control terminals for connection
of remote pushbuttons, auto circuits and local to motor emergency stop pushbuttons.
n. Each starter to be equipped with labels giving drive designation, plant number and
control operation.
o. All the auxiliary contacts to be wired down to the starter terminal block.
p. Triple pole contactors to be fitted with three normally open and three normally closed
auxiliary contacts.

2.16.7 Isolators/Moulded case circuit breakers to be provided with facilities for padlocking in the ‘OFF’
position.

All cubicles forming an MCC shall be bonded together with a copper earth tape extended to the
length of the MCC. This earth tape shall be 30mm x 6mm minimum and provision shall be made
for connection to the building earthing system.

BMS compatible PMU's shall be provided in the incomer and each outgoings more than 30KW

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 25 of 40
Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.17 MOTOR STARTER CONTROL CIRCUITS

2.17.1 Unless otherwise stated all the alarms and trips indicated, including overload trips, shall flash
on initiation and sound a klaxon. Pressing the ‘ACCEPT’ button shall mute the klaxon and
reduce the flashing lamp to a steady illumination. After alarm sources have cleared, pressing a
‘RESET’ button shall extinguish the lamp. If several alarms occur nearly simultaneously, the first
shall flash and all other be at steady illumination. Any alarm occurring after a prior one has
been accepted shall cause the new alarm to flash and the klaxon to sound.

2.17.2 A anti pumping circuit shall be provided in every instance of automatic control by a “2‐wire”
system, to ensure that in the event of tripping any drive while in automatic, the drive shall
remain tripped until manually re‐primed. This shall not apply to 3‐wire control (fleeting
contact). Where a priming circuit is employed a lamp shall be mounted on the starter door, to
indicate “starter primed”.

2.17.3 Prior to delivery of the MCC a full simulation test of the logic system shall be carried out at
Works, witnessed by the Employer’s representative. By the use of suitable simulated inputs and
outputs, the function of the logic provided shall be included.

2.17.4 A ‘TEST’ button shall be provided to test all alarm and indication lamps on the MCC. With the
exception of the overload trip lamps which shall be mounted on the starter cubicle, all other
alarm lamps shall be grouped in one common location.

2.18 SWITCHES/ ISOLATORS

2.18.1 Provide fusible and non‐fusible switches of one manufacture Type `HD' with quick‐make,
quick‐break contacts, horsepower‐rated where required, to match the motor protected. Provide
holders to accept specified fuses. Switches to include mechanical cover interlocks and line side
barriers.

2.18.2 Where applicable and available, switches shall be “Approved for High Service Factor".

2.18.3 Provide safety disconnect switches adjacent to motors and other equipment when required by
LOCAL AUTHORITY regulations. Use switches of one manufacture throughout.

2.18.4 All isolators for lire and life safety services shall be fire rated as per NFPA and Local Civil
Defence.

2.19 CAPACITOR BANKS

2.19.1 The contractor shall provide, install, connect, test and commission an automatic power factor
correction capacitor bank in steps of 15KVAR or as shown on the drawings in order to maintain
the overall power factor at not less than 0.92 (lagging) at all times as shown in the drawing.

2.19.2 The power factor improvement unit shall be automatic and generally comprise of the following :

Dry type capacitors with low power loss.

The capacitor shall from part of the distribution board.
The switching of capacitors shall be controlled by a solid state reactor relay operating through
contactors.

The control unit shall include:
Auto/manual mode selector switch.
On/Off push button for each switching stage.
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 26 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.20 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

2.20.1 The Contractor shall connect each separate portion of the works to the main earth system. The
main earth system will be connected to the main intake switchgear for the installation, and/or
earth electrodes. Main earth bus bars will be in the form of 25mm x 3mm HDHC bar copper
strip. Unless otherwise specified, the frames of all individual electrical apparatus shall be solidly
earthed by a copper connection of not less than 70 sq. mm to the main earth bus bar or
subsidiary earthing connections running from the main earth bus bar to a particular group of
equipment.

2.20.2 All joints between flat copper strip shall be lapped and brazed. All stranded copper conductors
shall be terminated by crimped lugs of approved pattern‐no straight through joints will be
permitted; crimped lugs shall be joined to secondary earth bars by steel bolts. At points of
contact where bolted connections are made, the copper surfaces shall be tinned.

The main earth bus bar and all subsidiary earth strips shall be fixed to concrete, brickwork and
steelwork by two‐hole brass clamps at 1 meter centres. Details of cleat, rack and clip
arrangements shall be submitted to the Employer’s representative for approval.

2.20.3 The frames of switchgear equipment and tanks of transformers shall be earthed by a copper
connection of at least 90 sq. mm direct to the main earth bus bar on the main intake switchgear.

Unless otherwise specified, where cables having metallic sheaths or armouring terminate on a
piece of plant, the sheath and armouring shall be bonded by copper connections to each other
and to the apparatus and items of plant. Separate earth Statutory Authority requirements shall
be installed with all armoured cables and shall be bonded to the earthing glands.

2.20.4 All conduits and trunking shall have good contact between each section. Trunking shall have
copper bonding straps between each section.

2.20.5 Earth connections shall be made onto conduits by means of heavy type copper clamps. Where
flexible metallic tubing is used for the final connections to machines or other items of
equipment, separate conductor shall be installed between the rigid conduit system and the
earth terminal(s) of the equipment.

All the cables conduits and trunking shall be adequately bonded to provide earth continuity.
Where joints are made in cables having metallic sheath or armouring, these joints shall be
adequately strong and well bonded to provide continuity and to keep continuity resistance
down to the required values. It shall be the Contractor responsibility to thoroughly test these
joints.

2.20.6 Continuity test and earthing test shall be undertaken to the satisfaction of the Employer’s
representative when the installation has been completed.

2.20.7 Earth rods shall be solid copper, minimum length 1.2m, having a diameter of not less than
17.5mm and having internal screw joints. Earth rod covers shall be formed in concrete.

2.20.8 Where a main earth is specified this shall consist of a number of solid copper earth rods driven
into the ground.

Earth rods shall be connected to each other and to the main earth test point using triangular
clamps fixed to the head of each rod and earth tape. The earth tape must be buried 750mm
below ground level and rise vertically alongside each rod to enter the clamp.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 27 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

Each earth rod shall have a concrete cover over it, set in flush with final ground level unless the
earth rod is installed through the bottom of a cable manhole or drawn in pit, in which case the
cover shall be permanently marked “Main Electrical Earth”.

2.20.9 Where armoured cables and bus‐bar trunking systems are installed then irrespective if the size
or resistance of the metallic armouring or casing, each armoured cable and bus‐duct shall be
provided with an Earth continuity conductor, the cross sectional area of which must be grater
than half that of the conductor cross‐sectional area provided that the resulting earth continuity
conductor is not less than required by local Electrical authority.

2.20.10 The main earth shall have an earth resistance not exceeding one ohm.

2.20.11 Structural earthing to be provided as the local regulations.

2.20.12 Earthing for structured cabling system & security systems to be provided separately.

2.20.13 All low current services & main LV cable entry to be provided with surge protection devices.

2.20.14 Lightning protection system shall be as per the BS 6651 1999.

2.21 UPS SYSTEM

2.21.1 General

The purpose of the system is to supply power to the essential loads uninterruptedly. The system
to be complete with Rectifier/battery charger, Inverter, Static inverter switch, Static bypass and
Maintenance bypass.

The rating of the system to be as specified on the design drawings.

The equipment to comply the essential requirements of European Directives 89/336/EEC,
73/23/EEC, and to EN50091‐2 & EN50091‐1‐1. UPS shall be UL listed.

2.21.2 Construction

The construction of the housing shall be industrial duty, flexible modular construction with the
use of galvanized or plated press formed steel section welded frame. The panels and doors shall
be constructed from more than 2 mm rust inhibited and treated sheet steel. All panel edges and
door corners shall be 'returned'. The front door shall have internal hinges & doors shall open
more than 120 degrees. The color shade and finish all be as per adjacent electrical board.

The enclosure ingress protection class shall not be less than IP‐42.

Provision shall be made for the cable entry into the enclosure through the base.

For cooling and ventilation, fan ventilated heat sinks with convected air exhausted to the
exterior through a top grill opening to be provided.

2.21.3 Electrical features

The system shall be complete with metering units, mimic of power flow, status indication, the
location of circuit breaker for input, output, bypass and the battery.

The system shall be an active on line system where the inverter provides high stability voltage
and frequency power at all times to the load and that the rectifier provides regulated DC power

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 28 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

for the inverter and to simultaneously charge the battery. The rectifier shall have a continuously
rated capacity to carry the inverter load and be able to simultaneously recharge the exhausted
battery to about 90% capacity with in ten times the stated autonomy. The inverter shall be pulse
width modulation type with the heat sink assembly.

The charger to be three phase rectifier to convert ac voltage to dc voltage and to be connected to
the mains via the commutation chokes

The battery to supply power in case of a short interruption or a total breakdown of A/c mains
supply. The capacity of the battery should be enough as required by the system minimum for
15minuites with full load. In case when it is feeding power to the light fittings, it should be able
to take the load till such time till the generator is able to take the load.

Maintenance bypass switch to be provided for the maintenance purpose. The design to be such
that maintenance bypass to supply power directly to the connected load during system
maintenance.

The operating panel to provide an option to communicate with a computer through RS232 and
RS 485 interfaces.

The system to be provided with 'Emergency power off' switch so that in case of emergency it is
possible to switch off the complete system.

The unit to be equipped with a LCD Panel (SFP) which shall be user interface of UPS. It should be
microprocessor controlled panel with alphanumeric display and provide:

Dialog controlled operation of the system (start up and shut down)
Indication of important values like current, voltage & frequencies.
Indication of UPS status.
Alarm messages
Communication with a computer.

2.22 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS

2.22.1 Exact location of outlets shall be determined on site as work progresses. Local switches for
lighting shall generally be installed on the lock side of doors. Verify switch locations on the site.

2.22.2 Device plates shall cover opening left for outlet box, and plates shall be attached to boxes in an
approved manner. Outlets and fixtures are to be located symmetrically, (i.e. cantered in wall
panels, ceiling panels or tiles, columns, between and above doors and the like).

2.22.3 The right is reserved to alter the location of equipment and outlets a distance of up to 3 metres
without involving a change to the Contract amount, providing notice is given prior to
installation.

2.23 TELEPHONE, CATV & DATA SYSTEM

2.23.1 General

These systems shall be executed by ETISALAT/DU approved specialist contractor to be
appointed by contractor. The same should have 5 years experience in respective field and to be
proposed by contractor for Employer’s representative’s approval. The Electrical contractor to
ensure and provide all the RJ‐45 Outlets, CAT‐6 & fibre Optic cables, conduits/raceways and

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 29 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

power required by this trade contractor in line with the requirements shown on the drawings
and in consultation with the specialist contractor of this trade.

All Fiber Optic cables in common areas shall be laid on cable tray and plenum rated fiber optic
cables only shall be used.

The electrical contractor shall fully liaison with this trade specialist contractor and no extra
claim shall be entertained on account of fulfilment of the requirement of this trade.
Contractor shall provide complete Data, Telephone & TV system as shown on drawings & as per
TRA requirements during execution of work.

2.23.2 Telephone system

Contractor shall provide necessary system along with containment, Fibre optic/CAT 6 cabling as
per client requirement as indicated in the drawing.

Contractor shall also be responsible for submission drawing to Authority, Approval and
providing functional system as per TRA requirements.

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing conduiting and cable tray and trunking system
including Telephone Wiring to TRA approval.

The Contractor shall liaise with Local Telephone Dept. to ensure that cable entry ducts and
internal conduit/trunking tray installations are approved prior to carrying out the installation
work.

Telephone outlet plates shall be of a type approved by TRA and shall be supplied and installed
by the Contractor at locations as indicated on the drawings. The outlet plate finish shall match
the finish of other wiring accessories in the same area.

All external cable ducts, manholes and draw‐pits shall be of a size and specification that is
approved by TRA.

JRC‐12 manholes to be constructed by Contractor based on TRA requirements.

Complete installation including telephone wiring, backbone cable sizes etc. shall meet TRA
requirements.

Risers shall be provided as shown on drawings including, telephone cabinets, terminal, riser
cables, etc.

Riser cable shall be provided as per requirement of TRA.

Contractor to submit the detailed shop drawing to TRA prior to carrying out any works at site.
25mm conduit shall be used for horizontal wiring.

Wiring shall be radial and multipair cable to be provided for each telephone outlet. Telephone
junction box and terminals shall be provided as shown and as required by ETISALAT/DU, for
retail areas for final wiring by tenant.

All necessary arrangements shall be made in the GSM rooms as per the TRA requirements,
which includes like, power outlets, OFC etc.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 30 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.23.3 Responsibility Matrix

TRA/ETISALAT/DU responsibility shall be limited to providing incoming cables up to the main

telephone room.

Contractor shall be responsible for complete distribution from Main telephone room up to
Warehouse/ show room DP and each outlet including testing and commissioning of complete
system along with wires.

The contractor shall be responsible for supply & installation of all internal building FO cables
from ODF to ONU locations, provision & installation of ODFs termination of Fibers,
Patching/Jumpering works & Optical Network units, provision of wall mounted or stand alone
cabinets to accommodate ONU, power, Patch panel etc. & complete structured cabling system.

PART – 3 EXECUTIONS

3.1 HOLES & DRILLING

3.1.1 Pneumatic hammers and percussion drills are prohibited.

3.1.2 Where not sleeved, make holes through concrete walls and floors by core‐drill only. Obtain
Employer’s representative’s approval before drilling.

3.1.3 Seal holes and sleeves through floors to serve as water dam.

3.1.4 Seal ends of conduits with conduit sealing bushings to provide hydrostatic seal against water
within conduit entering the building.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

3.2.1 Layout and install work in advance of other Sections for all new work. Bear all costs resulting
from failing to comply with this requirement.

3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

3.3.1 Coordinate for builder’s work to provide necessary excavating and backfilling inside and outside
building required for work of this Division, performed as specified under another Division of the
work, except as modified below.

3.3.2 Coordinate for builder’s work to keep excavations free from water, pump as necessary. Provide
and maintain adequate heat, shoring and other necessary temporary protection.

3.3.3 Coordinate for builder’s work for excavation of underground services which shall be to required
depths and dimension and shall be prepared as required, so that no portion of any conduit or
duct bank, bears directly against any rock or other hard surface.

3.3.4 Coordinate for builder’s work for removal and disposal of all surplus excavated material.

3.3.5 Coordinate for builder’s work for backfilling promptly after approval of work. Prevent damage
to or displacement of walls, piping, conduits, waterproofing and other work.

3.3.6 Coordinate for builder’s work for direct buried conduits and cables in all soiled conditions,
excavate to 150 mm (6") below and a minimum of 200 mm (8") to either side of the cable run.
Fill back with a bedding of sand.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 31 of 40
Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.3.7 Coordinate for builder’s work in providing sleeves under all roads and paved areas.

3.3.8 Before backfilling coordinate for builder’s work & obtain approval. Remove all shoring during
backfilling.

3.3.9 Coordinate for builder’s work & backfill trenches within building, with clean sharp sand in
individual layers of maximum 150 mm (6") thickness, compacted to a density of 100% Standard
Proctor. Hand compact the first layers up to a compacted level of minimum one foot. Hand or
machine compact the balance up to grade, using approved equipment.

3.3.10 Coordinate for builder’s work & backfill trenches outside buildings, not under roads, parking
lots, or traffic areas, up to a compacted level of 450 mm (18") above the duct bank with
individual layers of material up to 150 mm (6") thick, hand compacted to a density of 95%
Standard Proctor, using sand or granular 'A' gravel. Backfill the balance to 95% Standard
Proctor, using approved equipment.

3.3.11 Coordinate for builder’s work & backfill all other trenches outside buildings with granular `A'
gravel in layers not exceeding 150 mm (6") thickness, compacted to 100% Standard Proctor
density up to grade level; manual compaction up to 450 mm (18") and mechanical compaction,
using approved equipment, for the balance.

3.3.12 Coordinate for builder’s work & make good work where damaged by excavation and filling work
of this Division. Repair any subsequent settlement of fill placed under this Division and pay all
costs in replacement of other work damaged by such settlement and restoration.

3.4 CONCRETE WORK

3.4.1 Provide concrete work where required for work of this trade in accordance with applicable
requirements specified in Concrete Division.

3.5 HANGERS & INSERTS

3.5.1 Provide necessary hangers and inserts for work of in Division 26 05 29

3.6 PAINTING

3.6.1 Hangers, support framing and all equipment fabricated from ferrous metals which are not
protected with zinc or other suitable corrosion‐resistant finish shall have at least one coat of a
corrosion‐resistant paint applied before shipment or immediately on arrival at the site.

3.6.2 After installation, touch up all scratches, chips, other damage and defects in paint, using zinc
chromate primer or paint or special enamels as necessary to match the original.

3.6.3 Finish and colour of all equipment shall be co‐ordinated to provide uniform appearance.

3.6.4 Painting of conduits and supports and other exposed surface work will be done under Painting
Section except as noted. Install materials in time to be painted together with mounting surfaces.

3.6.5 Do not paint over nameplates.

3.6.6 Refer to other Sections for special paint finished of equipment.

3.7 NAME PLATES AND SCHEDULES

3.7.1 Identify electrical equipment supplied under this Division with 3 mm thick black laminated

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 32 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

plastic nameplate to indicate equipment controlled to provide instruction or warning. Fasten

each plate with two chrome‐plated screws. Lettering shall be 6 mm high for small devices such
as control stations and at least 13 mm high for all other equipment. Submit a list of proposed
nameplates for approval before manufacture.

3.7.2 Provide panel boards with typewritten schedules identifying outlets and equipment controlled
by each branch circuit. Protect schedules with non‐flammable clear plastic.

3.7.3 Identify junction boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduits and the like, provided for future
extension, indicating their function (e.g. power, fire alarm, communication).

3.7.4 Verify room names and names prior to listing on nameplates and schedules.

3.7.5 Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplates for all emergency services. (EM) panel boards
and all associated disconnect switches and circuit breakers to read "Emergency Services, Do Not
Interrupt".

3.8 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING AND FEEDER CABLES

3.8.1 Provide all wiring, disconnects and outlets for connections to the elevators to the approval and
requirements of the elevator installer.

3.9 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS

3.9.1 Wire and cable shall be installed in conduit as follows:

Rigid galvanized steel conduit with threaded IPS fittings to be used:

1. Where noted and required by regulations.
2. Where subject to mechanical damage.
3. For all exposed conduit work.
4. All exposed conduting above false ceiling and in voids

3.9.2 Conduit embedded in concrete or buried below grade floors shall be approved rigid PVC type.

3.9.3 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used in place of rigid conduit in dry locations subject to
governing regulations, embedded in masonry walls, and concealed above suspended ceilings.
Connectors shall be provided with factory‐installed insulated throats. Connectors and couplings
to be forged steel.

3.9.4 Fasten every conduit and cable to structure by means of approved conduit clamps or clips. Wire
lashing is not acceptable.

3.9.5 Conceal conduits and wiring except where noted. Run exposed conduits parallel to building
lines and to other conduits. Provide every empty conduit with a pull rope (3 mm polypropylene
rope) and identify to designate its function (Power, Telephone, Fire Alarm and the like).

3.9.6 Where conduit is installed in concrete slabs, obtain general approval, prior to commencing the
work, on both maximum dimension and cross‐overs which may be used therein.

3.9.7 Install conduits in such a manner as to conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible
with free use of space through which they pass. Obtain approval for routing of same. Keep
conduits at least 150 mm clear high temperature work.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 33 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.9.8 Conduit installed at the roof level of exposed structures, shall be run tight to roof deck, above
purlins and beams.

3.9.9 Run conduit exposed in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical rooms, fan rooms, and the like,
and installed after mechanical and other equipment is completed. Install fixtures, outlets,
starters, etc., to clear and to suit application.

3.10 WIRE AND CABLE

3.10.1 Wiring to heating equipment shall be rated 90oC minimum, the capacity of which shall be limited
to 75oC value.

3.10.2 Conductors used for all auxiliary systems (e.g. Fire Alarm) shall be tagged and/or colour‐coded,
and where applicable shall agree with manufacturer’s wiring diagrams.

3.10.3 Minimum wire size for power wiring shall be 4 mm unless specified otherwise. Control wiring
shall be 1.5mm red insulation. Maximum voltage drop between furthest outlet of any circuit,
when fully energized, and panel to which it is connected shall not exceed two percent except for
electric heating circuits, which shall not exceed one percent.

3.10.4 Cables shall be terminated with moisture‐proof connectors, clamped to sheet metal enclosure
by a single non‐ferrous locknut and grounding bushing.

3.10.5 Number of wires indicated for lighting and power, motor and motor control, alarm, signal,
communications, and auxiliary systems is intended to show general scheme only. The required
number and types of wires shall be installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
diagrams and requirements, and with requirements of the installation, except that specification
standards shall not be reduced.

3.10.6 Use compression joints and terminals for all control wiring; and all conductors 1.5mm and
larger. Mechanical connections are acceptable at panel boards and circuit breakers where these
are part of factory‐assembly.

3.10.7 Wire or cables in feeders, sub‐feeders and branch circuits shall be colour‐coded in accordance
with LOCAL AUTHORITY Code. Each end of feeder terminations (e.g. in Switchboard, Panel
boards, switches, splitters and the like) Code Phase A ‐ Red, Phase B ‐ Yellow, Phase C ‐ Blue,
Neutral ‐ Grey.

3.10.8 Include in each conduit, tubing and raceway, a code gauge green supplementary ground
conductor which shall be connected to suitable ground bus in equipment.

3.10.9 The use of exposed plastic‐jacketed cables shall be subject to approval of ADDC, but shall not be
installed in ceiling spaces used as return air plenums for mechanical air‐handling systems.

3.10.10 Cable Installation

3.10.10.1 General

a. The arrangement of cables and all methods of installation shall be approved by the
Employer’s representative.
b. Cables shall be installed from terminal point to terminal point and straight‐through joints
shall not be made unless approved.
c. The radius of each bend or change in direction of the route of any cable shall not be less
than that laid down in the relevant table of manufacturer regulations and shall generally

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 34 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

not be less than eight times the overall diameter of the cable.
d. The spacing of cable supports shall be those laid down for the relevant size and type of
cable in the current issue of the local regulations, but the horizontal longitudinal distance
between wire armoured cable support centre shall not exceed 1 meter, the horizontal
distance between support centers for either type of cable on vertical runs is not to exceed
1 meter. Cables of and less than 50mm external diameter shall be supported at not more
than 800mm centre.

3.10.10.2 Cables Direct In Ground

a. All cables shall be laid at depths specified or, where unspecified, at not less than 900mm
for LV cables and 950 for H.V cables at all points and where this depth is not possible
approved mechanical protection shall be provided. All underground cables should be
protected with concrete protection tile & PVC warning tape with warning in both Arabic &
English. Provide 200mm of clean, dry, sieved compacted soft sand fill to install cable in
trench or underground.
b. All underground cable routes shall be marked at 15 meter intervals, at changes of
direction and at straight through cable joints by approved markers.

3.10.10.3 Cables Direct In Ducts

a. Where cables pass under roads or rail tracks and where shown as being in ducts in the
particular specification, the cables shall be drawn into ducts.
b. The removal of temporary plugs, rodding and cleaning of the ducts shall be responsibility
of the Contractor.
c. Particular attention shall be given to the sealing of ducts where any of such ducts enter
cable trenches within the confines of the building.
d. Where cables are detailed to be drawn into ducts, cable pulling grips with rotating eyes
shall be used and the cables shall be supported on rollers without sharp edges during
drawing operation. All cable ducts shall first be cleaned and proved by drawing a
mandrel of slightly less diameter than the duct immediately before pulling the cables.
Suitable man‐holes shall be provided for pulling the cables in ducts.

3.10.10.4 Cable Laid On Trays

a. Cables shall be laid in a single tier on the cable tray, unless otherwise approved and neatly
installed. Trays shall only be cut along a line of plain metal (not through perforations).
All cut edges shall be prepared and treated accordingly to original finish of metal. Where
welding have been employed, in fabrication and also on galvanised tray, a zinc rich paint
shall be used for this treatment.
b. Bends and tees shall be made of the same material, finish and thickness as straight trays.
At each end of the bends and tees, a minimum of 10mm straight run shall be provided.
c. Cable trays shall be supported by mild steel galvanise brackets at regular intervals of
1.2m maximum and at 225mm from bends and tees. Mushroom‐headed steel roofing
bolts and nuts shall be used for the installation and coupling of trays. Cable trays brackets
shall be sufficient depth to provide access to the rear of the tray for easy installation of
PVC saddle type fixings.
d. All cables shall be secured to cable trays by means of PVC covered copper saddles of the
two screw fixing of type of PVC covered metal strip with non‐corrodible cheese‐headed
screws and nuts. The shanks of the screws shall be protruded beyond the nut by more
than three threads. Alternatively purpose made cable fixing devices may be proposed for
consideration. Horizontal and vertical clearance between cables shall be such that no
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 35 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

reduction in rating is necessary. Horizontal cable run shall be tied with cable tray using
cable ties, subject to Employer’s representative’s acceptance.

3.10.10.5 Cable Terminations

a. All jointing material to be used shall confirm to the relevant BS and LOCAL AUTHORITY
requirements and the Contractor shall state the quality of the compounds he proposes to
use, which shall be entirely suitable for the site conditions.
b. All cables shall be colour coded in accordance with the IEE Regulations current edition
and amendments and all sealing and jointing work shall be in accordance with the best
current practice and of fist calls workmanship.
c. Joints in LSF/PVC or XLPE cables shall not be carried out without the written approval of
the Employer’s representative. Low tension cable joints shall incorporate compression
type ferrules with polyethylene tape insulation housed in a plastic joint box and sealed
with cold pouring resin filling.
d. Where single core cables are used, all necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent
hysteresis. Ferrous plates through which the cables pass shall be slotted and brass glands
and sockets shall be used. Single core cables shall be very rigidly clamped to prevent
distortion under short circuit conditions.
e. The ends of each LSF/SWA/LSF cable shall be terminated in brass compression type cable
glands of the correct size which shall secure the cable inner sheath and ensure effective
electrical continuity between the cable armouring wires and the metal enclosure on
which the cable is terminated. A copper earth link shall be taken from the cable
termination point to an associated sub‐switchboard or main switchboard earth bar. XLPE
cables shall be terminated in terminal boxes or other equipment supplied under another
Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the terminations in
accordance with the requirements specified above including the supply and jointing of
tails where necessary and the testing to verify correct phasing of all cores.

3.10.10.6 Identification

a. All cable ends shall be marked to identify the cable connection. Identification labels for all
cables shall give the cable an approved reference number.
b. All cable shall have a label fixed to them below each cable joints, also where the cables
passes through ducts and trenches at each exit from or entry to such ducts and trenches
and where the cable enters a room or building. The label shall indicate the cable potential
and destination as well as the cable number.

3.11 GENERAL PURPOSE SMALL POWER AND PROVISION OF HAND DRYERS

3.11.1 The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission a complete small power installation
which shall comprise typically, but not limited to, sockets outlets, double pole switches, spur
outlets and miscellaneous supplies, as identified on the drawings.

3.11.2 Wiring for the general purpose socket outlets shall be carried out using a minimum stranded
4mm2 PVC cables for the live, neutral and earth conductors wired as ring circuits, installed in
trunking and conduit. Contractor shall be responsible to provide LSF wires, if insisted by the
local authority and civil defense at any point of time.

3.11.3 Wiring for radial circuits serving water heaters, hand dryers, fan coil units etc shall be carried
out using stranded 4mm2 PVC cables, for live, neutral and earth and installed in trunking and
conduit.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 36 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.11.4 All outlets within core areas shall be brushed stainless steel finish, subject to Employer’s
representative’s approval.

3.11.5 Plant room areas, risers and within ceiling voids shall be provided with surface metal clad type
outlets.

3.11.6 For finishes within apartments accessories refer specification “SECTION 26 27 26” or as
described on drawings.

3.12 CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING, CONDUITS AND TELECOM CONDUIT INSTALLATION

3.12.1 The Contractor shall supply and, install a complete trunking, cable tray and conduit installation
as shown on the drawing.

3.12.2 The trunking and tray routes shown on the drawings relate to the main distribution spine only.
The Contractor shall include for all other supplementary cable tray, trunking and conduits to
serve the electrical, mechanical and telecom services equipment and installations.

3.12.3 The systems shall comprise:

1) Galvanised dual compartment trunking for lighting and small power circuits
2) Galvanised heavy duty cable tray or cable rack system for sub‐mains cables
3) Galvanised heavy duty cable tray for ELV systems
4) Heavy duty cable tray/basket for telecom cables
5) Heavy Duty GI trunking for Intercom, CATV & CO monitoring
6) 20mm / 25mm GI conduit for exposed installation
7) 20Φ and 25Φ conduit serving all local lighting and small power
8) 25Φ conduit serving telecom outlets, Intercom, CATV & CO monitoring.

3.12.4 Generally items 1, 2, 3 and 4 shall be routed in ceiling voids in main circulation areas as shown
in the drawings. The Contractor shall provide detailed co‐ordination drawings of these services
taking account of separation requirements between the various services, particularly separation
between LV systems and telecom systems to comply with the recommendations of industrial
standard T/A/EIA568A/569.

3.12.5 The Contractor shall provide details of fixing and suspension arrangements for the trunking /
tray installations for review by the Employer’s representative.

3.13 SUPPLIES TO MECHANICAL PLANT

The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation and commissioning of all
electrical supplies to enable the building to be fully operational. This shall include, but not
limited to all equipment identified on the various mechanical equipment schedules and
equipment identified on the electrical drawings and cable schedules. This will include but not
limited to, pumps, fan coil units, air handling units, motor control centers, mechanical control
panels and other associated mechanical plant.

3.14 LOW CURRENT (ELV) SYSTEM

The Contractor will be required to install small power and associated control cabling pathways
associated with the various security systems.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 37 of 40
Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.15 FACILITIES FOR TELECOM SYSTEMS

3.15.1 ETISALAT / DU will be the development’s service provider for telephone and television services.

The Contractor will be required to install all containment and power supplies associated with
the service and as per the TRA/ ETISALAT & DU requirements.

3.16 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

3.16.1 Use suitable electrical boxes for terminations and junctions on conduit work. Install pull boxes
where necessary to permit installation of conductors. Support pulls boxes, outlet boxes, panels
and other cabinets independently of conduit.

3.16.2 Provide each light switch, wall receptacle and other device with an outlet box of suitable
dimensions and a faceplate. Outlet boxes shall be adapted to their respective locations.

3.16.3 Electrical boxes and panels shall be code‐gauge sheet metal, galvanized or with suitable
protective treatment. Secure covers with screws or bolts.

3.16.4 Outlet boxes shall not be installed "Back‐to‐Back" in walls; separate by a minimum of 150 mm.

3.16.5 Use "Masonry Type" outlet boxes for flush installation in masonry walls.

3.16.6 Install surface mounted devices, in cast conduit fittings, with threaded hubs and galvanized steel
faceplates.

3.16.7 Main pull and junction boxes (excluding obvious outlet boxes) shall be clearly identified by
painting the outside of the cover in accordance with the following schedule:

‐ Lighting Yellow
‐ Power Blue
‐ Emergency Power Orange
‐ Fire Alarms Red
‐ Telephone Cream
Or as approved by Employer’s representative.

3.16.8 In addition, each box shall be identified with a system and service designator of logic reference
to the service.

3.17 PANEL BOARDS

3.17.1 Provide handle locking devices on circuits breakers feeding Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating
equipment and controls and all auxiliary systems, time switches, and other as noted. Paint
handles white, to permanently identify location and function. Provide 12 spare handle locking
devices for future use.

3.17.2 Circuit numbers on drawings do not necessarily correspond to the numbers on the lighting
panels. Circuits sharing a common neutral shall not be connected to the same main. Panel
circuit breakers, which are used directly for the switching of lighting fixtures, shall be grouped
in consecutive numbers commencing at breaker number one.

3.17.3 Provide empty conduits from flush panel boards, and others as noted, terminating in accessible
ceiling spaces, sized to accommodate spare and space breaker provisions. One 25 mm (1")
conduit for each three spare breakers or space.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 38 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.18 ELECTRIC WORK FOR OTHER DIVISIONS

3.18.1 Examine Architectural and Mechanical (Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning)
plans and specifications to determine extent of electrical work in connection with these
Divisions which is to be done under the work of the Electrical Division.

3.18.2 In general, all motor starters and associated controls for mechanical equipment will be supplied
under that Division of the work which supplies the equipment, for installation and connection
under the work of the Electrical Division 26. Refer to the Mechanical Division 21, 23 & 23
Specifications for the exact intent and extent of the work to be included in the Electrical
Division.

3.18.3 Co‐ordinate the exact location and verify characteristics of electrical provisions for the work of
the Mechanical Division.

3.18.4 Co‐ordinate with the work of the Division 21, 23 & 23 Mechanical Trade Sections to ensure
proper location of equipment. The exact locations of conduit terminations at Mechanical units
shall be determined from equipment manufactures' approved shop drawings. Conduits must be
installed to enter only in the locations designated by equipment manufactures.

3.18.5 Provide safety switches required for disconnection of remotely controlled motors, and where
required at motors by safety regulations. Where required at fan motors, they shall be concealed
in the fan housing if possible.

3.18.6 Provide for the 220 volt mechanical equipment where noted, all necessary wiring and
connections including wiring and installation of starters, thermostats, aquastats, speed
controllers and time switches controlling equipment.

3.18.7 Where motor starters, switches and the like, are grouped together, a suitable 19 mm (3/4")
thick plywood panel board shall be provided to which all such equipment shall be secured.
Provide all necessary angle iron supports for support of panel board and paint entire assembly
with two coats of enamel.

3.18.8 Provide weather proof unfused safety disconnects switches, fastened to exterior of outdoor
units, to approval.

3.18.9 Connect high temperature thermostats "Firestats" provided in ductwork by Division 15, to
exhaust fan systems, to provide fan shutdown on activation.

3.19 GROUNDING ‐ GENERAL

3.19.1 Ground all electrical systems in accordance with provisions of the Electrical Code.

3.19.2 Install grounding conductors to permit the shortest and most direct path from equipment to
ground. Install grounding conductors in rigid galvanized conduit with both conductor and
conduit bonded at both ends. Provide bonding jumpers with approved clamps to maintain
ground continuity of metallic raceway systems at all expansion joints.

3.19.3 Ground connections to grounding conductors shall be accessible for inspection and made with
approved solder less connector bolted to the equipment of structure to be grounded. Clean
contact surface prior to making connections to ensure proper metal to metal contact.
Connections shall be of the type that grounds both conduit and conductor, and cap screws, bolts,
nuts and washers shall be silicon bronze.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 39 of 40

Section 26 06 00
Basic Materials & Methods CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.20 WATERTIGHT SEAL AT EXTERIOR WALLS

3.20.1 Provide "Link‐Seal" sleeve devices distributed by Corrosion Services Limited, or approved equal,
cast into exterior walls below grade for conduits and cables which pass into finished spaces.
Convert non‐metallic ducts to rigid steel conduits through such seals.

3.21 FIREPROOFING & SEALING

3.21.1 Make watertight seal at sleeves at other openings through floors above grade. Sleeves to extend
minimum 25 mm (1 inch) above finished floors.

3.21.2 Provide Fireproofing protection of openings through floors and fire rated walls as per civil
defence requirements, subject to Employer’s representative’s approval.

3.21.3 Roof flashing for conduit feeders to roof mounted equipment shall be sealed and flanged to roof
with Thaler or equal pre‐insulated aluminium flashing sized to suit. Install in accordance with
civil defence, NFPA, manufacturer's instructions and details.

3.22 TESTING OF SPECIALIST EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS

3.22.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting tests and commissioning proposals for the
Employer’s representatives approval/comment for all specialist equipment and system supplied
under the Contract.

3.22.2 This shall include such items as recording sound level of fire and voice alarms etc.

3.22.3 During any such test all safety devices should be tested and faults simulated on the system.

3.22.4 In addition to the above, the tenderer shall include for tests on the wiring/cabling for such
services as Fire and Voice Alarms, Intercommunication systems, General Alarms to be made
prior to the terminal equipment being connected but with the cable terminations completed as
per the NFPA, Civil defense and approved cause and effect matrix, in order to preclude damage
to the terminal equipment and to obviate any adverse effects on the test results. Emergency
lighting lux level, voice evacuation sound level test shall be carried out as per NFPA, Civil
defense and local authority codes.

3.22.5 Infrared scanning for hot spot detection of the cable and all busbar joints shall be considered
during handing over and twice during defect liability period with full load.

3.23 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

The standard specifications for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based on
relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and complying
with intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered subject to proper
compliance / justification to the satisfaction of Employer’s representative.

END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 40 of 40



ANNEXURE – 06
26 0800 ELECTRICAL TESTING &
COMMISSIONING

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 26 08 00
Electrical Testing & Commissioning CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

ELECTRICAL TESTING & COMMISSIONING

CONTENTS


SUBSECTION TITLE

PART ‐ 1 GENERAL
1.1 Section Includes
1.2 Related Sections
1.3 References
1.4 Submittals for Review
1.5 Quality Assurance
1.6 Qualifications
1.7 Warranty

PART ‐ 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Product Requirement

PART ‐ 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
3.2 Preparation
3.3 Works
3.4 Field Quality Control
3.5 Cleaning
3.6 Protection of Finished Work
3.7 Standard Specification

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 8

Section 26 08 00
Electrical Testing & Commissioning CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART – 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1.1.1 Compliance with other relative sections, base built specifications.

1.1.2 Conform to General Requirements for MEP Services of section 01 05 00.

1.1.3 The Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the Specifications affecting work of
this trade.

1.1.4 Furnish all labour, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all necessary
operations required to execute the work of this section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1.2.1 This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the related sections within the
Project Specifications. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's
responsibility to ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full Scope of Works
intended.

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be those standards referred to
or relevant BSI standards. In addition, the following additional standards also apply: Where ADDC
standards exceed other standards they supersede other standards.

 BS 7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations)
 ADDC Regulations
 Applied testing and commissioning procedure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

1.4.1 Submit samples, specifications, Testing and commissioning (T & C) procedure, T & C formats, T &
C checklist Method statement for Testing and commissioning, engineering calculations, catalogue
cut sheets, description of product and installation method in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Submissions shall indicate all dimensions, details of construction, details of
installations, relation and connections with adjoining work.

1.4.2 Submit copies of test reports required to be performed on the proposed products. Submit a list of
installation completed where proposed products were used.

1.4.3 Submit all test results and certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1 Perform Work in accordance with relevant British Standards and industry standard codes.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6.1 Only skilled electricians with appropriate training, experience and qualifications shall be allowed
to undertake electrical testing.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 8

Section 26 08 00
Electrical Testing & Commissioning CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.7 WARRANTY

1.7.1 All materials shall have a standard 12 month warranty from the time of practical completions.
The Contractor shall allow for extended warranties beyond this period where indicated in this
document or elsewhere within the main contract documents. The extended warranties shall be in
the Client’s name and be handed over at the time of practical completion.

PART – 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

2.1.1 INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

 Comply with BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations (the IEE Wiring Regulations),
IEE Guidance Notes Number 3 Inspection & Testing and other British Standards as
appropriate.

2.1.2 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS

 Obtain information called for in BS 7671 about supply characteristics from Supplier, other
than where to be measured as part of testing procedure.

2.1.3 DESIGN INFORMATION

 Obtain all design assumptions, calculations and any other information to enable compliance
with BS 7671 to be verified.

2.1.4 INCORPORATED EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS:

 Obtain and use information from manufacturers of equipment provided.
 Use information provided, for equipment supplied by others and incorporated into
installation

2.1.5 INITIAL VERIFICATION

 Carry out detailed inspection to verify the requirements of BS 7671 Section 712 in the order
given in clause 712‐01‐03 for New Installation or Altered or Added Installation as
appropriate.

As part of this visual inspection the following shall be verified:

The installed systems of equipment are in compliance with British Standards.
The installed equipment is correctly selected and in accordance with BS 7671.
The installed systems and equipment are not damaged so as to impair safety.

2.1.6 TESTING

 The electrical installations shall be inspected and tested by the Contractor in accordance with
BS 7671 (IEE Regulations), particularly section 713 and all results obtained to be witnessed
and recorded on test record sheets of an approved format.

 It should be noted that electronic components may sustain serious damage as a result of
certain accepted electrical installation test procedures. Conductors and other circuit
components shall be tested prior to them being connected to electronic components.
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 8

Section 26 08 00
Electrical Testing & Commissioning CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

Electronic equipment shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

 The presence of electronic components shall be noted clearly on the circuit cards and in
operating and maintenance manuals with an indication that testing procedures may result in
damage.

 During construction of the works, the Contractor shall undertake all necessary tests to ensure
compliance with BS 7671 (IEE Regulations) and the Specification.

2.1.7 TESTS TO BE UNDERTAKEN

 The following items, where relevant, shall be tested in accordance with BS 7671 (IEE
Regulations), Section 713 in the sequence indicated.

 Continuity of Ring Final Circuit conductors
 Continuity of Protective Conductors
 Earth Electrode Resistance
 Insulation Resistance
 Insulation of Site‐Built Assemblies
 Electrical Separation of Circuits
 Protection Against Direct Contact by Barriers or Enclosures Provided During Erection.
 Polarity
 Earth Fault Loop Impedance
 Operation of Residual Current Operated Protective Devices
 Prospective Short Circuit Current
 Surface temperature measurements under load conditions
 Type tests according to specified short circuit currents

2.1.8 CERTIFICATION

 Following the inspection and testing required by Chapter 7 of the IEE Regulations, a
Completion Certificate shall be given to the Engineer.

 The Certificate shall be in the form set out in Appendix 6 of the IEE Regulations. Any defects
or omissions revealed by inspection or test shall be made good before a Completion
Certificate is issued.

 An Inspection Certificate (see IEE Regulation 741‐01‐01) shall accompany and be attached to
the Completion Certificate.

2.1.9 CONTINUITY OF RING CIRCUIT FINAL CONDUCTORS

 Confirm continuity. Use AC or DC source BS 7671, section 713‐03‐01 applies.

2.1.10 CONTINUITY OF PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

 Confirm continuity. Use AC source or DC source.

2.1.11 STANDBY GENERATORS:

 Perform works tests on standby generators and provide test certificates. Comply with BS
5000 ‐ Parts 11 and 3 or BS EN 60034‐3 as appropriate.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 8

Section 26 08 00
Electrical Testing & Commissioning CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.1.12 EARTH ELECTRODE RESISTANCE

 Where it is necessary to measure the resistance of an earth electrode, the test method shall be
as described in BS 7430: 1991, Section 3, Part 16. Where it is not practical to drive auxiliary
earth test electrodes into the general earth mass, then any known good earth may be utilised
subject to agreement with the Engineer.

2.1.13 INSULATION RESISTANCE

 Every test described in BS 7671 (IEE Regulations) Section 713‐04 shall be made and proven
satisfactory before the installation is permanently connected to the supply. A dc voltage not
less than twice the normal voltage of the circuit concerned (r.m.s. value for an ac supply) shall
be applied for the measurement of insulation resistance, provided that the test voltage need
not exceed 500 V dc for installations rated up to 500 V or 1000V dc for installations rated
above 500 V up to 1000 V (All in accordance with BS 7671 IEE Regulation 713‐04‐04).

 When measured between all the conductors connected to any one phase or pole of the supply
and, in turn all conductors connected to each other phase or pole, the insulation resistance
shall be not less than 1 megohm. Wherever practicable, so that all parts of the wiring may be
tested, all lamps shall be removed and all current using equipment shall be disconnected and
all local switches controlling lamps or other equipment shall be closed.

 Where the removal of lamps and / or the disconnection of current using equipment are
impracticable, the local switches controlling such lamps and / or equipment shall be open.
Particular attention shall be given to the presence of electronic devices connected in the
installation and such devices shall be isolated so that they are not damaged by the test
voltage, (in accordance with BS 7671 IEE Regulation 713‐04‐02).

 Where equipment is disconnected as prescribed in the BS 7671 IEE Regulations and the
equipment has exposed conductive parts, the equipment shall be tested in accordance with
BS 7671 IEE Regulation 713‐04‐06.

2.1.14 INSULATION OF SITE‐BUILT ASSEMBLIES

 The protection against direct contact is intended to be afforded by insulation applied to live
parts. During erection, in accordance with Regulation 412‐02, it shall be verified that the
insulation is capable of withstanding, without break‐down or flashover, an applied voltage
test equivalent to that specified in the British Standard for similar factory‐built equipment (as
required by BS 7671 IEE Regulation 713‐05‐01).

 Where protection against indirect contact is provided by supplementary insulation applied to
equipment during erection in accordance with BS7671 (IEE Regulation) 413‐03, it shall be
verified by test (in accordance with IEE Regulation 713‐05‐02).

2.1.15 ELECTRICAL SEPARATION OF CIRCUITS

 Where BS 7671 (IEE Regulation) 413‐06 and 491‐12 applies, the electrical separation of the
separated circuit shall be inspected and/or tested. (In accordance with IEE Regulation 713‐
06).

2.1.16 PROTECTION AGAINST DIRECT CONTACT BY BARRIERS OR ENCLOSURES
PROVIDED DURING ERECTION

 Where protection against direct contact is intended to be afforded by barriers or enclosures
provided during erection in accordance with BS7671 (IEE Regulations) 412‐03, it shall be

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 8

Section 26 08 00
Electrical Testing & Commissioning CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

verified by test that the enclosures or barriers afford a degree of protection not less than IP2X
or IP4X as appropriate, where those regulations so require (in accordance with IEE
Regulation 713‐07‐01).

2.1.17 POLARITY

 A test of polarity shall be made and it shall be verified that all circuit breakers and single pole
control devices are connected in the phase conductor only, that centre contact bayonet and
Edition type screw lamp holders in circuits having an earthed neutral conductor have their
outer or screwed contacts connected to that conductor, and that wiring has been correctly
connected to socket outlets (in accordance with IEE Regulation 713‐09‐01).

2.1.18 PROSPECTIVE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT (IP)

 Determine values of IP by measurement, unless other means are indicated. Determine IP at all
necessary points within installation to confirm correct equipment selections.

 Obtain from supply undertaker written confirmation of maximum and minimum values of IP
at origin of installation. Adjust subsequent measured values of IP accordingly.

2.1.19 TEST EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES

 Provide test equipment and consumables to complete tests satisfactorily, and to retest any
failed installations following corrective measures. Test equipment quality assurance
requirements to BS EN 30012‐1.

2.1.20 SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS

 Confirm characteristics and settings of protective devices are within maximum and minimum
specified tripping times.

 Check correct operation of devices.

 Confirm interlocks and sequences operate safely and as indicated.

2.1.21 HV AND LV SWITCHGEAR

 Perform works tests on HV and LV switchgear in accordance with BS EN 60298 and BS EN
60439‐1, as appropriate, and provide test certificates.

2.1.22 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM INSTALLATIONS

 Carry out site testing and inspection and provide test certificates for fire detection and alarm
systems in accordance with BS 5839.

2.1.23 LIGHTNING PROTECTION INSTALLATIONS

 Carry out site testing and inspection and provide test certificates for lightning protection
installations in accordance with BS 6651.

2.1.24 FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATIONS

 Carry out site testing and inspection and provide test certificates for fire protection of
electronic data processing installations in accordance with BS 6266.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 6 of 8

Section 26 08 00
Electrical Testing & Commissioning CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.1.25 FIRE EXTINGUISHING INSTALLATIONS

 Carry out site testing and inspection and provide test certificates for fire extinguishing
installations and equipment on premises in accordance with BS 5306.

2.1.26 EMERGENCY LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

 Carry out site testing and inspection and provide test certificates for emergency lighting
installations in accordance with BS 5266.

2.1.27 CALIBRATION

 Provide current certificates of calibration for all instruments used during test procedures.
Record particular instrument identity on record sheets.

2.1.28 CERTIFICATION AND REPORTING

 Complete and hand over to the Client a Completion and Inspection Certificate to BS 7671
Appendix 6 for New Installation or Altered or Added Installation as appropriate.

2.1.29 COMPLETION CERTIFICATES

 Provide completion certificates for electrical installations in accordance with BS 7671 (IEE
Regulations).

 Record details of departures from BS 7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations) on certificate.

 Provide copies of calculations justifying departure from BS 7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations)
and attach to certificates.

PART – 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

3.1.1 Verify site conditions as indicated in 26 05 00.

3.1.2 Before undertaking any testing, verify that building electrical and mechanical systems are
completed and correctly installed.

3.2 PREPARATION

3.2.1 Verify site conditions as indicated in 26 05 00.

3.3 WORKS

3.3.1 Before beginning testing in any area, examine all parts of the adjoining structure and systems.
Should any conditions be found which will prevent the proper execution of the work, installation
shall not proceed in that area until such conditions are corrected by the contractor.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.4.1 Provide field quality control as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 7 of 8
Section 26 08 00
Electrical Testing & Commissioning CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.5 CLEANING

3.5.1 Cleaning installed work as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

3.5.2 Remove labels after Work is complete.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

3.6.1 Protect work as indicated in the Employer’s Requirements.

3.6.2 Provide temporary protection to finished work of others during testing. Remove upon
Completion.

3.7 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

3.7.1 The standard specifications for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based on
relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and complying to
intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered subject to proper
compliance / justification to the satisfaction of engineer

3.7.2 This standard specification is intended to be used as a helpful indication of work within this
section. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's responsibility
to ascertain and complete the full works intended and as specified in the specification and
Contract or thereby implied.

END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 8 of 8



ANNEXURE – 07
26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 26 09 23
Lighting Control Equipment CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

CONTENTS


SUBSECTION TITLE


PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 General Requirements and Related Documents
1.2 Scope and Description of Work
1.3 Guarantees
1.4 Quality Assurance
1.5 Submittals

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Lighting Control System
2.2 System Design

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation of Lighting Control Equipment
3.2 Standard Specification

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 8

Section 26 09 23
Lighting Control Equipment CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.1.1 Compliance with other relative sections, base built specifications.

1.1.2 Conform to General Requirements for MEP Services of section 01 05 00.

1.1.3 Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this section
whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

1.1.4 Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.

1.2 SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.2.1 Extent of lighting control equipment work is specified in the specification, and is hereby defined
to include, but not by way of limitation, transceivers with power supplies, relays, switches, and
ancillary equipment.

1.2.2 Types of lighting control equipment specified in this section include the following:

1.2.3 Requirements are indicated elsewhere in these specifications for work including, but not limited
to, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings, required for installation of lighting control
equipment; not work of this section.

1.3 GUARANTEES

1.3.1 Attention is directed to provision of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND SPECIAL
CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract.

1.3.2 Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this Section. However,
such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturers
and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1 Manufacturers: Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting control equipment and
ancillary equipment of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.4.2 Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with
lighting control equipment installation work similar to that require for project.

1.4.3 IEE, Compliance: Comply with requirements of IEE as applicable to electrical wiring and
communications installation work.

1.4.4 BS Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of BS standards pertaining to types of electrical
equipment enclosures.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

1.5.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control equipment and components.

1.5.2 Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layouts of lighting control equipment and accessories
including but not necessarily limited to, relays and switches, which show accurately scaled
equipment layouts, wire/cables routing and connections to electrical power feeders.
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 8

Section 26 09 23
Lighting Control Equipment CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

2.1.1 General

To comply with mandatory requirement of Abu Dhabi Municipality, Lighting Control system
proposed, which shall allow ON/OFF control of lighting in a predetermined pattern via sensors,
switches, timer clocks, contactors all in accordance with end user requirement and as specified in
the specifications.

The proposed system shall be based on EIB lighting control and shall include but not limited to
the following:

1) Lighting control Panel.

2) Motion Sensors
3) Programmable timers
4) Photo cells/Daylight sensors for external lighting control and warehouse
5) Low voltage switches (Override/Master switches)
6) passive infrared sensor (PIR sensor)

2.1.2 The system shall be completely centralized.

2.1.3 It is Contractor’s scope and responsibility to re‐arrange circuiting to achieve the functionality as
explained without any claims.

2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN

2.2.1 The lighting control system shall consist of low voltage relay control panels that are able to
network. Each panel is to be made of distributed logic components that are programmable,
addressable and do not require a central operator for control. The system shall be modular in
design and scaleable for future expansion of the system.
2.2.2 Each low voltage lighting control panel shall contain microprocessor controlled input or control
relay modules each containing an individual microprocessor.
2.2.3 Programmable intelligence shall include Time‐Of‐Day control, 32 holiday dates, warn occupants
of an impending off, timed outputs, preset control, auto daylight savings, control based on
outdoor light level, optional astronomical clock w/offsets and local control.
2.2.4 Each low voltage lighting control panel shall offer 8, 16, 24, or 32 programmable switch inputs
and 8, 16, 24, 32, 40 or 48 programmable control relays.
2.2.5 The control system shall provide networking between sets of up to ten lighting control panels
without adding communication or networking cards in each of these ten panels. The control
system network may support no less than 500 control panels. Sets of up to ten lighting control
panels shall be wired to the same line (twisted pair network). Networking between lines shall be
possible via twisted pair with a Line Coupler.
2.2.6 A set of up to ten low voltage lighting control panels with up to 320 inputs and 480 relay outputs
shall be able to network without using communication or networking cards in any of these ten
panels. Each panel shall contain an RS232 interface module for access to and configuration of any
of the ten control panels. The set of up to ten low voltage lighting control panels shall consist of a
base panel and up to nine expansion panels. The base panel shall be marked as Panel A, the
expansion panels shall be marked as Panel B, Panel C, Panel D, Panel E, Panel F, Panel G, Panel H,
Panel J and Panel K.
1. Panel A (first panel) shall provide up to 32 programmable switch inputs, up to 48
programmable control relays, an RS232 interface module for access to and configuration
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 8
Section 26 09 23
Lighting Control Equipment CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

of any of the set of ten control panels, a time‐clock with four time channels shall be
optional.

a. Additional options for Panel A:

1.) Time‐clock with [four] [sixteen] channels
2.) Dual Sensor for outdoor ambient light level based control and temperature
monitoring.
3.) Touch Panel user control interface
4.) Key switch interface
5.) Up to two instabus motion sensors per panel
6.) IP Interface for Internet Protocol access via LAN.

b. These options shall be added without using any of the programmable switch inputs
on any of the panels.

2. [Each of the Panels [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [J] [K] shall provide up to 32 programmable
switch inputs, up to 48 programmable control relays, an RS232 interface module for
access and configuration of any one of the set of ten control panels. ]

a. Additional options for Panel B‐K
1.) Touch Panel user control interface
2.) Up to two motion sensors
b. These options shall be added without using any of the programmable switch inputs
on any of the panels.

3. [Each individual control relay shall provide an optional timer delay function with output
timers for [30] [60] [90] [120] [180] [210] [240] [270] [300] [330] [360] minutes.]

4. [Each individual control relay shall provide an optional Warn Off (flash the lights) to
inform the occupants of an impending Off command. The Warn Off command shall blink
the lights 5 minutes before expiration of the timer. The occupants may exit the premises
with adequate lighting or cancel the Warn Off by overriding the lighting zone. This option
occurs with all OFF commands except local overrides.]

5. Each individual control relay shall permit lighting to be overridden ON. The control
system shall provide timed overrides assigned to specific relays. Override times may be
configured to [30] [60] [90] [120] [180] [210] [240] [270] [300] [330] [360] minutes.
Once the timed override expires the control system shall return the relays to their
programmed state. These overrides shall be hard‐wired inputs.

6. Configuring the control system shall be through a Palm OS or PC based configuration
software. The Palm OS device or PC may be connected to any one of the panels in the
control system via the RS232 interface module. The PC based configuration software shall
permit either local configuration via the RS232 interface module. Descriptive information
shall assist the user to employ the system without a programming manual.

7. Each control relay output shall provide a logic control function for logic (AND, OR)
combination of inputs controlling the output relay. Logic AND control enables or disables
an output relay based on Time of Day scheduling or any input in the system. Logic OR
control provides forced ON control of an output relay by Time of Day scheduling or from
any input in the system.

8. The system shall allow the installation of load relays inside the factory enclosure or on
any remote location. Only twisted pair wire shall be required from the panel for control
and communications with the remotely installed relays.
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 8

Section 26 09 23
Lighting Control Equipment CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

B. HARDWARE FEATURES

1. Operator Interface

a. The control panel programming interface resides in firmware in the relay outputs
and schedule assignments. Systems that utilize blocking diode technology for relay
assignments shall not be acceptable.

2. Contact Inputs

a. The control system shall permit up to 32 dry contacts (Digital/Switch Inputs) per
control panel. Momentary 2 wire (toggle) inputs shall be supported. Maintained
contacts shall be supported as 2 wire (SPST) inputs. Inputs shall be dry contacts
(24 VDC @ 12 mA supplied to the inputs). An input shall be software link‐able to
any number of relays for [override] [control] [override and control].

3. Relay Type

a. The system shall utilize control relays, which are rated to 20 amps at 277 VAC max.
The relays shall be mechanically held and are provided in groups of eight. The
relays shall be rated for 1 million mechanical operations. A limited 2‐year warranty
shall be provided on the individual relays.
b. The relays shall be modular in design and offer a manual override switch for
manual control of the relay even in absence of control power to the relay module.
The manual override switch should also provide visual indication of relay status.
c. Two relay outputs may be switched simultaneously for two pole loads.
d. The relay modules shall be approved for switching of different voltage levels or
phases on adjacent relays.

4. Time Clock

a. The control system may contain a 4 channel time clock for individual time control of
four groups of relays. The control system shall provide power for the time clock
thereby eliminating any external power supply. The time clock shall provide 372
Time of Day/holiday schedules for weekly, or 365 day programming.
b. [Optionally the control system shall contain a 16 channel time clock. The control
system shall provide power for the time clock thereby eliminating any external
power supply. The time clock shall provide 372 Time of Day/holiday schedules for
weekly, or 365 day programming. At least 4 of the 16 channels shall have
astronomical clock function. ]
c. The time clock shall utilize a battery back‐up for the schedules and the operation of
the quartz time clock. The time clock shall be protected against power interruptions
lasting as long as two years.
d. The control system shall provide option for up to two motion sensors per control
panel. The control system shall provide power for the sensor thereby eliminating
any external power supply. The sensor shall be for indoor applications and provide
the control signal to any number of output relays if motion is detected. The motion
sensors shall be connected to the panel with low voltage twisted pair.

5. Modular Design

a. The control system shall employ an all modular design for easy addition of input or

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 8

Section 26 09 23
Lighting Control Equipment CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

relay output modules. The system shall still function if single modules should fail.
b. All connections for the switch inputs shall incorporate quick connect terminals. The
relay modules shall be designed for rapid field replacement or addition. Systems
that do not employ a modular design shall not be acceptable.

6. Memory Back‐Up

a. Any control system component with a microprocessor shall utilize non‐volatile
memory to store configuration data. The data shall be protected against power
interruptions lasting as long as ten years. The data storage shall be entirely
maintenance‐free.

7. Control Power Supply

a. The control system shall incorporate the use of UL listed Class 2 power supply (120
VAC).

8. Optional Forced Control Override

a. Each relay module shall provide a forced control override of all relays in a relay
module for service or priority override purposes. The forced control override may
be applied via the Palm OS or PC based configuration tool, the optional Touch
Display, or a dedicated forced control maintained three‐way switch input.
b. The forced control shall override provides “ALL ON”, "AUTO" and "ALL OFF" control
of the relay modules. The forced control shall operate all of the relays in the control
relay module. This forced control shall override and supersede all commands from
other inputs when the forced control is in the “ALL ON or ALL OFF” position.
c. The system shall remember the last command to the individual relays. Upon
returning the forced control override to the "AUTO" position, the relays shall return
to the most recent command state. This will occur even if the last command
happened during the forced control override condition.

9. Lockable Enclosure

a. Each control panel shall be enclosed in a lockable, NEMA class 1 enclosure. The
enclosure shall be manufactured out of steel per UL916. Panels should offer a key
lock option.

10. [Enclosure Wall Mounting

a. The enclosure shall be for [surface] [flush] mounting.]

11. Internet Protocol Interface

a. The control system shall be capable of interfacing with a Local Area network using
the Internet Protocol.
b. The system shall permit: Local Area Network (LAN), On‐Site & Off‐Site
communications with the PC Set‐up software.

12. PC Based Set‐Up Software

a. PC based Set‐up software shall enable any MS‐Windows PC to configure any lighting
control panel connected to the network. The PC connection shall be an RS‐232
direct connection to the lighting control panel at 9600 baud. The configuration
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 6 of 8

Section 26 09 23
Lighting Control Equipment CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

software shall permit the user to modify the control system configuration while the
control system is in operation. The control system shall not be taken to an "OFF‐
LINE" mode. This software package shall store all programmed data and archive
for future use.
b. The web access software package shallconnect to the lighting control system via an
IP interface. It shall permit the PC to be utilized for other functions (i.e. word
processing, database, etc.) besides lighting control. Systems that require an "on‐
line" dedicated computer for control system operation shall not be acceptable.
c. The following features shall be standard in the PC based Set‐up software:

1.) Web Access Software Features:

a.) Real Time Relay Status Monitoring
b.) Alpha‐Numeric Descriptors
c.) Manual Relay Commands
d.) [Remote reading of outdoor light level and temperature] [Note:
Outdoor Light Sensor is then required.]

2.) File Maintenance

a.) Archive Programs
b.) Data Base Restoration
c.) Uploading and Downloading of Configuration
d.) E‐mailing function

13. Configuration Interface (RS‐232 Port)

a. Each control panel in the network shall provide an RS‐232 module to permit
configuration of any panel from any panel in the system using a Palm OS or PC
based Set‐up software. The control panel shall provide an RS‐232 module. PC
software shall permit multiple file storage for data archival and for seasonal facility
requirements.
b. Operator commands may be issued directly from the Palm OS device or PC
keyboard.

14. Network (EIB)

a. The control system shall be capable of panel‐to‐panel communications over a hard‐
wired data network. The network shall consist of twisted pair of wire utilizing the
EIB communication standard. The communication standard shall allow a maximum
distance of 1100 feet for panel to panel communication.
b. For networks having greater than 10 panels, they shall be able to support up to 500
panels. Communications shall be over IP with CAT6 cable.

15. Building Automation System (BAS) Interface:

a. The lighting control system shall be able to interface to systems that utilize the
Internet Protocol on an Ethernet network, or the EIB standard. This will allow the
BAS systems to control and retrieve the status of inputs and outputs in the lighting
control system.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 7 of 8

Section 26 09 23
Lighting Control Equipment CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

b. The lighting control system shall be able to interface to BAS with the use of OPC
technology.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.1.1 The control system shall be installed and fully wired as shown on the plans by the installing
contractor. The contractor shall complete all electrical connections to all control circuits and
override wiring.

3.1.2 The contractor is responsible for complete installation of the entire system according to strict
factory standards and requirements. The following items shall constitute factory standards and
requirements.

3.1.3 All system equipment shall operate in accordance with specification and industrial standard
procedures.

3.1.4 An operational user program shall exist in the control system. The program shall execute and
perform all functions required to effectively operate the site according to the requirements.

3.1.5 A demonstration of program integrity during normal operation and pursuant to a power outage
shall be performed.

3.1.6 Install lighting control system components and ancillary equipment as Indicated, in accordance
with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to
ensure that lighting control equipment complies with requirements. Comply with requirements
of IEE, and applicable portions of BS "Standard of Installation" pertaining to general electrical
installation practices.

3.1.7 Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings, as
necessary to interface installation of lighting control equipment work with other work.

3.2 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

The standard specifications for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based on
relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and complying to
intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered subject to proper
compliance / justification to the satisfaction of Employer’s representative


END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 8 of 8



ANNEXURE – 08
26 2400 AUTO TRANSFER SWITCH

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 26 24 00
Auto Transfer Switch CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

CONTENTS


SUBSECTION TITLE

PART – 1 GENERAL

1.1 References

1.2 Quality Assurance

1.3 Submittal

1.4 Warranty

PART – 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Automatic Transfer Switch

PART – 3 EXECUTIONS

3.1 Installation

3.2 Tests

3.3 Acceptance

3.4 Standard Specification

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 5

Section 26 24 00
Auto Transfer Switch CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART – 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

1.1.1 Compliance with other relative sections, base built specifications.

1.1.2 Conform to General Requirements for MEP Services of section 01 05 00.

1.1.3 Section: 26 23 00 – Diesel Generator Sets.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.2.1 Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished
under requirement of this specification shall conform to latest publication or standard rule of the
following:

ADDC UAE fire code and NFPA

1.2.2 Product selection for restricted space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for the equipment,
including clearance between the equipment and adjacent surfaces and items. Switchgears having
equal performance characteristics and complying with indicated maximum dimensions may be
considered.

1.2.3 Source Limitations: All transfer switches are to be obtained through one source from a single
manufacturer.

1.3 SUBMITTAL

1.3.1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

 Technical data on all major components of all transfer switches and other products described
in this section. Data is required for the transfer switch mechanism, control system, cabinet,
and protective devices specifically listed for use with each transfer switch. Include steady
state and fault current ratings, weights, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties
and accessories.

 Single‐Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch,
power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch
and bypass/isolation switch.

1.3.2 Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances,
conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each
switch specified.

 Dimensioned outline drawings of assembly, including elevations, sections, and details
including minimal clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and
devices and material lists for each switch specified.

 Internal electrical wiring and control drawings.

 Interconnection wiring diagrams, showing recommended conduit runs and point‐to‐point
terminal connections to generator set.

 Installation and mounting instructions, including information for proper installation of
equipment to meet seismic requirements.
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 5

Section 26 24 00
Auto Transfer Switch CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.3.3 Manufacturer and Supplier Qualification Data

 The transfer switch manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality
Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in
design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO 9001.

 The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum
period of 10 years. When requested, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment
shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.

1.3.4 Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:

 Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.

 List of all factory settings of relays, timers and protective devices; provide setting and
calibration instructions where applicable.

1.4 WARRANTY

1.4.1 The manufacturer shall warrant the material and workmanship of the transfer switch equipment
for a minimum of 12 months from registered commissioning and start‐up.

1.4.2 The warranty shall be comprehensive. No deductibles shall be allowed for travel time, service
hours, repair parts cost, and etc. during the minimum noted warranty period described above.

PART – 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

2.1.1 The automatic transfer switches shall be rated to withstand the rms. symmetrical short circuit
current available at the automatic transfer switch terminals, with type of over current protection,
voltage as shown on the plans.

2.1.2 Automatic transfer switch shall consist of power transfer module and a control module,
interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. Automatic transfer switch shall be
mechanically held and electrically operated by a single solenoid mechanism energized from
source to which the load is to be transferred. Switch shall be rated for continuous duty and be
inherently double throw. Switch shall be mechanically held and interlocked to ensure only one of
two possible positions normal or emergency.

2.1.3 A Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch may be used to provide emergency power to life safety and
other critical loads where maintenance of the main transfer switch, without interruption of
power to the load, is either desirable or required. It should be such that it is possible to use
bypass section for a full load transfer to the alternate source without being hindered by
interlocking used on some contactor‐type designs. The bypass section shall be properly
interlocked to prevent simultaneous connection to both sources, but do not prevent using the
bypass section as a manual transfer switch in an emergency. The Bypass Isolation Switch is to be
designed for applications where maintenance, inspection and testing must be performed while
maintaining continuous power to the load. This is typically required in critical life support
systems and standby power situations calling for safe system maintenance with no power
disruptions.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 5

Section 26 24 00
Auto Transfer Switch CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.1.4 Automatic transfer switches shall be suitable for use with emergency sources such as an engine
or turbine generator source or another utility source. Control module shall be supplied with a
protective cover and be mounted separately from the transfer switch for ease of maintenance.
Sensing and control logic shall be solid state and mounted on plugin printed circuit boards.
Printed circuit boards shall be keyed to prevent incorrect installation. Interfacing relays shall be
industrial control grade, plug in type with duct covers and locking clips. The following shall also
be provided for the control module:

1. For single phase switches, the normal source voltage across live lines shall be monitored, and
for three phase switches all phases of the normal shall be monitored line to line. Close
differential voltage sensing shall be provided. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 72% to
100% of nominal.
2. Neutral conductor terminal lugs as required for the system and a test switch to momentarily
simulate normal source failure shall be included.
3. Harnessing between transfer switches and control panel shall have a built in disconnect for
routine maintenance.
4. All movable parts of operating mechanism shall remain in positive mechanical contact with
the main contacts during the transfer operation without use of separate mechanical
interlocks. Automatic operation of the switch shall not require power from any source other
than the line to line voltage of the source to which the switch is transferring.

The following accessories shall be included;

1. (TDNE) Time delay on transfer from normal to Emergency (adjustable 0 to 30 minutes)
2. (TDES) Time delay on engine starting (factory set at 3 seconds)
3. (TDEN) Time delay on transfer from Emergency to normal (adjustable 0‐30 minutes)
4. Frequency / voltage relay for emergency source (non adjustable)
5. Test push button to simulate a power failure on normal.
6. Disconnect plug to prevent automatic operation
7. Green lamp to indicate switch in normal position & normal power is supplying loads.
8. Red lamp to indicate switch in emergency position & emergency power is supplying loads.
9. Main Shaft auxiliary contact rated 10Amps at 480V (One closed on normal and one closed on
emergency).
10. Relay auxiliary contact (normal source 2 NO and 2 NC)
11. Relay auxiliary contact (emergency source 2 NO and 2 NC)
12. Solid state battery charger, 3Amps charge rate.
13. Phase monitor. Monitors normal and emergency sources and permits transfer when phase
voltages are plus / minus 15 degrees and plus / minus 2 cycles. If the source supplying the
load fails or drops below 70%, the monitor will permit immediate transfer.
14. Load shedding contacts (2 NO and 2 NC) that operate from an adjustable 0.6‐60 seconds
prior to transfer in either direction or resets immediately after transfer.
15. Auto transfer switch shall be UL listed.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 5

 Section 26 24 00
Auto Transfer Switch CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART – 3 EXECUTIONS

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 The equipment shall be installed as shown on the plans, in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and all applicable codes.

3.2 TESTS

3.2.1 Perform automatic transfer tests:

1. Simulate loss of normal power.

2. Return to normal power.
3. Simulate loss of emergency power.
4. Simulate all forms of single‐phase conditions.
Automatic transfers should operate in accordance with manufacturer's design.

3.2.2 Operation and Timing Tests

Verify correct operation and timing of the following functions:

1. Normal source voltage‐sensing and frequency‐sensing relays.
2. Engine start sequence.
3. Time delay upon transfer.
4. Alternate source voltage‐sensing and frequency‐sensing relays.
5. Automatic transfer operation.
6. Interlocks and limit switch function.
7. Time delay and re transfer upon normal power restoration.
8. Engine cool down and shutdown feature.
Operation and timing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's and system design requirements.

3.3 ACCEPTANCE

3.3.1 Manufacturer’s representatives and installation specialist, shall provide documentation to evidence
that tests and Employer’s representative instructions have been performed to their satisfaction, and
additionally to indicate that:

1. System complies with manufacturer’s installation recommendations.
2. Installation is acceptable for warranty.
3. Installation complies with requirements of local regulations.

3.4 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

The standard specifications for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based on
relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and complying to
intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered subject to proper
compliance / justification to the satisfaction of Employer’s representative

END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 5



ANNEXURE – 09
26 2816.16 ENCLOSED SWITCH

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 26 28 16.16
Enclosed Switches CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

ENCLOSED SWITCHES

CONTENTS


SUBSECTION TITLE

PART – 1 GENERAL
1.1 Section Includes
1.2 Related Sections
1.3 References
1.4 Submittals for Review
1.5 Quality Assurance
1.6 Qualifications
1.7 Environmental Requirements
1.8 Warranty


PART – 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Characteristics
2.2 Construction
2.3 Listing


PART – 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 Installation
3.2 Standard Specification

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 4

Section 26 28 16.16
Enclosed Switches CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART – 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1.1.1 Compliance with other relative sections, base built specifications.

1.1.2 Conform to General Requirements for MEP Services of section 01 05 00.

1.1.3 The Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the Specifications affecting work of
this trade.

1.1.4 Furnish all labour, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all necessary
operations required to execute the work of this section.

1.1.5 This section describes the technical and workmanship requirements for electrical switchboard.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1.2.1 This schedule is intended as a helpful indication of the related sections within the Project
Specifications. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's
responsibility to ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full Scope of Works
intended.

26 06 00 Basic Electrical material and methods
26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes
26 27 26 Wiring Accessories

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 All electrical installations shall be carried out in accordance with the best International Standards
and Codes of Practice specifically with the current issue of the IEE Regulations (BS 7671) and the
requirements of the supply authority – Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (ADDC).

1.3.2 The entire installation shall be installed and tested in accordance with the relevant British and
International Standards and requirements of ADDC.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

1.4.1 Submit samples, specifications, engineering calculations, catalogue cut sheets, description of
product and installation method in accordance with the Contract Documents. Submissions shall
indicate all dimensions, details of construction, detail of installation, relation and connections
with adjoining work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1 Perform Work in accordance with relevant British Standards and industry standard codes.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6.1 The specialist who supplies the switches shall have supplied and supported similar system in the
UAE.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1.7.1 The switches shall be suitable for the environment in which they are sited.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 4

Section 26 28 16.16
Enclosed Switches CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.8 WARRANTY

1.8.1 All materials shall have a standard 12 month warranty from the time of handing over. The
Contractor shall allow for extended warranties beyond this period where indicated in this
document or elsewhere within the main contract documents. The extended warranties shall be in
the Client’s name and be handed over at the time of practical completion.

PART – 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CHARACTERISTICS

2.1.1 Voltage: Provide switches with a voltage rating of 600 volts a‐c, as required for the installed
system voltage.

2.1.2 Type: Provide switches conforming to NEMA KS 1 standard for Type HD (heavy duty).

2.1.3 Contacts: Provide switches with quick‐make, quick‐break contacts.

2.1.4 Poles. As indicated on plans.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

2.2.1 Enclosure:

Provide IP‐42 switch enclosures for indoor dry locations where ever applicable (If) and IP‐65 for
outdoor locations unless otherwise shown.

2.2.2 Operating Handle:

Provide a handle suitable for padlocking in the OFF position with as many as three padlocks of
8mm diameter shank. Use a defeatable, front accessible, coin‐proof door interlock to prevent
opening the door when the switch is in the ON position and to prevent turning the switch ON
when the door is open.

2.2.3 Terminal Shield:

Provide incoming line terminals with an insulated shield so that no live parts are exposed when
the door is open.

2.2.4 Neutral:

Provide each switch with an isolated, fully rated neutral block. Make provisions for bonding the
block to the enclosure.

2.2.5 Ground:

Provide each switch with a ground lug.

2.2.6 Fuse Holders:

Where fusible switches are shown, provide switches with rejection‐type fuse
holders which are suitable for use with fuses specified under specifications Section, Fuses ‐ 600
Volt and below.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 4

Section 26 28 16.16
Enclosed Switches CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

2.2.7 Nameplates:

Provide metal nameplates, front cover mounted that indicates the switch type, catalog number
and horsepower rating (with both standard and time delay fuses).

2.3 LISTING

2.3.1 UL 98 ‐ Safety Standard for Enclosed Switches.

PART – 3 EXECUTIONS

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 In general, mount so that operating handle is approximately 120cm above finished floor. Where
grouped, align tops of switches.

3.2 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

3.2.1 The standard specifications for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based on
relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and complying to
intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered subject to proper
compliance / justification to the satisfaction of Employer’s representative


END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 4



ANNEXURE – 10
26 4300 SURGE PROTECTION

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 26 43 00
Surge Protection CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

SURGE PROTECTION

CONTENTS

SUBSECTION TITLE

PART – 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1.3 REFERENCES
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.8 WARRANTY

PART – 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM SURGE ARRESTORS
2.2 SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES (SPD)
DOCUMENTATION & TESTING

PART – 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 HANDLING AND STORAGE
3.3 FABRICATION
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.5 CLEANING
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
3.7 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 5

Section 26 43 00
Surge Protection CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART – 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1.1.1 This section supplements all other Contract Documents and forms part of every section of
Division 26 Electrical.

1.1.2 Include The Employer’s Requirement as part of this section.

1.1.3 The Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the Specifications affecting work of
this trade.

1.1.4 Furnish all design, labour, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all necessary
operations required to execute the work of this section.

1.1.5 This section describes the technical requirements for transient over voltage surge suppression
systems.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1.2.1 This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the related sections within the
Project Specifications. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's
responsibility to ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full Scope of Works
intended.

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be those standards referred to
or relevant BSI standards. In addition, the following additional standards also apply:

 BS EN 62305 part‐4
 BS 6651
 BS 2914
 BS 7671
 CCITT IX K12
 CCITT IX K17
 CCITT IX K25
 ECMA 97
 IEEE C62.41
 UL 1449
 AS 1768

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

1.4.1 Submit samples, specifications, engineering calculations, catalogue cut sheets, description of
product and installation method in accordance with the Contract Documents. Submissions shall
indicate all dimensions, details of construction, details of installation, relation and connections
with adjoining work.

1.4.2 Submit copies of test reports required to be performed on the proposed products.

1.4.3 Submit a list of installation completed where proposed products were used. Submit single line
wiring diagrams showing the wiring configuration for all Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
installed. Show all conductors and terminal numbers.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 5

Section 26 43 00
Surge Protection CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1 Perform Work in accordance with relevant British Standards and industry standard codes.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6.1 System shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified company with a 10 year history of
supplying transient over voltage suppression systems to ensure credibility of warranty and
continuity of technical support. Five equivalent size project references shall be provided for
reference and system demonstration.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1.7.1 Store SPD equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.

1.7.2 The external environment is hot (up to 52ºC), humid (up to 32ºC saturated and moisture contents
up to 0.030 kg/kg), dusty (up to 70mg/m³) and saline (within 200m of the shoreline).

1.8 WARRANTY

1.8.1 All materials shall have a standard 12 month warranty from the time of handing over. The
Contractor shall allow for extended warranties beyond this period where indicated in this
document or elsewhere within the main contract documents. The extended warranties shall be in
the Client’s name and be handed over at the time of practical completion.

PART – 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM SURGE ARRESTORS

2.1.1 All applicable standard specifications noted under item 1.3.1 shall apply.

2.1.2 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (SPD) shall be provided at each main L.V. switchboard.

2.1.3 Power Conditioning Filter, Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (SPD), and high frequency
electrical line noise filtering to meet BS 6651 & BS EN 62305 part‐4. The unit shall be connected
on the load side of each main switchboard.

2.1.4 Unit shall operate on a voltage system of 230/400 volts, 50 Hz. 3 phase grounded star point.

2.1.5 The unit’s primary mode of protection shall be line‐to‐neutral. The secondary nodes of protection
shall be line‐to‐ground and neutral‐to‐ground.

2.1.6 The unit shall include an engineered solid‐state high‐performance suppression system, utilizing
selenium cells and fused non‐linear voltage dependent metal oxide arrestors, with similar
operating characteristics. The unit shall provide solid‐state suppression area of 2520 sq. inches to
ensure maximum performance reliability. The unit shall include a high‐frequency extended
range‐tracking filter. The filter shall reduce fast rise‐time, high frequency, error producing
transients and electrical line noise to harmless levels.

2.1.7 The unit shall include solid‐state, long‐life, externally mounted LED visual status indicators that
indicate the on‐line status of each phase of the unit.

2.1.8 The unit shall incorporate an integral test point, allowing easy off‐line diagnostic testing, which
verifies the operational integrity of the unit’s suppression/filter system. Standard surface‐
mounted units shall be provided in an enclosure of 14‐gauge steel, painted inside and out. The

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 5

Section 26 43 00
Surge Protection CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

unit shall include an integral fused and safety interlocked disconnect switch, located in the unit
enclosure with an externally mounted manual operator. The switch shall disconnect all
ungrounded circuit conductors from the distribution system, to enable testing and maintenance
without interruption of power to the facility’s distribution system. The switch shall be rated for
600 V AC. Each current‐carrying ungrounded circuit conductor connected to the facility’s
distribution system shall be individually fused.

2.2 SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES (SPD) DOCUMENTATION & TESTING.

2.2.1 Equipment Manual ‐ The manufacturer shall furnish an equipment manual with installation,
operation, and maintenance instructions for the specified unit.

2.2.2 Drawings ‐ Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer, which
show unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection details and layout diagram of
the unit.

2.2.3 Suppression Ratings ‐ Documentation of unit’s suppression rating shall be included, as required
product data submittal information. Manufacturer shall make available upon request certified
documentation of applicable Location Category Testing, in full compliance with BS6651.

2.2.4 Spare Parts ‐ A list of customer‐replaceable spare parts shall be included in the unit’s installation,
operation and maintenance instructions. All spare parts shall be quickly and easily field‐
replaceable.

PART – 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

3.1.1 Before ordering any materials / commencing work verify that building structure associated with
the system is within tolerance and take full account of shape configuration and material
properties of the structure.

3.2 HANDLING AND STORAGE

3.2.1 Deliver component parts to site, completely identified in accordance with shop and certified
drawings prepared for this work. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above
ground, properly protected from the weather and construction activities.

3.3 FABRICATION

3.3.1 All components shall be fabricated at the manufacturers production facility

3.3.2 Before beginning installation in any area, examine all parts of the adjoining work into which
applicable work is to be placed. Should any conditions be found which will prevent the proper
execution of the work, installation shall not proceed in that area until such conditions are
corrected by the contractor.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.4.1 Provide field quality control as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

3.5.1 Cleaning installed work as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 5
Section 26 43 00
Surge Protection CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

3.5.2 Remove labels after Work is complete.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

3.6.1 Protect work as indicated in The Employer’s Requirements.

3.7 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

3.7.1 The standard specifications for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based on
relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and complying to
intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered subject to proper
compliance / justification to the satisfaction of Employer’s representative.

3.7.2 This standard specification is intended to be used as a helpful indication of work within this
section. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's responsibility
to ascertain and complete the full works intended and as shown within the specification and
Contract or thereby implied.

END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 5

 ANNEXURE – 11
26 5100 LAMPS AND LUMINAIRES

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 26 51 00
Lamps & Luminaires CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

LAMPS AND LUMINAIRES

CONTENTS


SUBSECTION TITLE

PART – 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1.3 REFERENCES
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.8 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.5 EARTHING
3.6 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

APPENDIX A – LAMPS AND LUMINARIES

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 5

Section 26 51 00
Lamps & Luminaires CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PART – 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1.1.1 This section supplements on all other Contract Documents and forms part of every section of
Division 26 Electrical and shall be read in conjunction with Section 26 06 00 and 01 05 11.

1.1.2 Include The Employer’s Requirements as part of this section.

1.1.3 The Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the Specifications affecting work of
this trade.

1.1.4 Furnish all labour, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all necessary
operations required to execute the work of this section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1.2.1 This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the related sections within the
Project Specifications. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's
responsibility to ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full Scope of Works
intended.

26 06 00 Basic material and method
26 05 53 Electrical Identification
26 27 26 Wiring Accessories.

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be those standards referred to
or relevant BSI standards. In addition, the following additional standards also apply:

- BS 7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations)
- CIBSE
- ADDC Regulations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

1.4.1 Submit samples, specifications, engineering calculations, catalogue cut sheets, description of
product and installation method in accordance with the Contract Documents. Submissions shall
indicate all dimensions, details of construction, detail of installation, relation and connections
with adjoining work.

1.4.2 Submit copies of test reports required to be performed on the proposed products. Submit a list of
installation completed where proposed products were used.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1 Perform Work in accordance with relevant British Standards and industry standard codes.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6.1 Suppliers of luminaries shall demonstrate that they have supplied and supported the proposed
manufacturer’s luminaries in U.A.E. for the last five years.



Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 5

Section 26 51 00
Lamps & Luminaires CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1.7.1 Luminaries shall be suitable for the environment in which they are installed.

1.8 WARRANTY

1.8.1 All materials shall have a standard 60 month warranty from the time of practical completions.
The Contractor shall allow for extended warranties beyond this period where indicated in this
document or elsewhere within the main contract documents. The extended warranties shall be in
the Client’s name and be handed over at the time of practical completion.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

Refer base built specifications for the type of light fixtures, required illumination levels and
details of lighting control. All light fixtures shall be LED type. Contractor shall provide complete
design along with lux level calculations. Light fittings shall be in scope of contractor only.
Contractor has to take the approval from the Employer’s representative as far as aesthetic
purpose.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

3.1.1 The Contractor must examine the areas and conditions in which the luminaires will be installed
and correct or bring to the attention of the Employer’s representative for any unsatisfactory
conditions before installation commences.

3.2 INSTALLATION

a. Install lighting fixtures at locations as indicated in accordance with fixture

manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of IEE and BS "Standard of
Installation" and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill
requirements.

b. The attention of the Contractor is directed to the various types of ceiling finishes e.g.,
exposed tee, concealed spline, plaster, etc. Perusal of the ceiling finish schedule is
mandatory.

c. All fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps. Permanent lighting fixtures shall be
installed after completion of all masonry and structural work and shall not be used for
lighting purposes during construction. The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting
as herein before specified.

d. Mounting heights of fixture shall be as per the approved shop drawings. Where job
conditions require mounting heights different from those specified or shown to avoid
equipment or structural features, etc., such changes in mounting heights shall be as
directed by the Employer’s representative.

e. Lighting fixtures shall be set plumb, square, level and in alignment and shall be secured
in accordance with manufacturer's directions and approved shop drawings.

f. The Contractor executing the work under this section of the Specifications shall examine
the architectural, mechanical and structural drawings to acquaint himself with the
structural features of the building and the location of pipes, ducts, etc., which would alter
the location or spacing of outlets to the Employer’s representative for a decision as to the
proper location. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper reinforcement of any
Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 5
Section 26 51 00
Lamps & Luminaires CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

ductwork necessary to carry the added weight of lighting fixtures where same must be
mounted on the bottom of such ductwork.

g. All conductor installation shall be suitable for the maximum temperatures they will be
subjected to, in luminaire canopies and outlet boxes, etc. Cables shall be kept clear from
the surface of the temperature can reach 90C.

3.2.1 INTERNAL LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION

a. Luminaires shall be arranged for surface, recess or pendant mounting as required by the
general structure and decor of the building. Where a suspended ceiling is provided,
recess mounted luminaires shall be fitted.

3.2.2 SURFACE MOUNTED LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION
a. All surface or pendant mounted luminaires shall be fixed to a surface or flush mounted
metal conduit box. Direct surface mounted luminaires shall be spaced a distance of
12mm from the mounting surface by using extension rings.

b. The connection between the permanent wiring and the luminaire shall be made using
150C rated cable. The cable shall be connected using a porcelain or heat resistant
connector block housed in the conduit box.

3.2.3 RECESS MOUNTED LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION

a. All recess mounted luminaires shall preferably be suspended independently of the
ceiling in which they are fitted. Where such an arrangement is not possible or practical,
the luminaires shall be fitted in and supported by the ceiling. The Contractor shall ensure
that the suspended ceiling is suitably strengthened to carry the additional weight.

b. The connection between the permanent wiring and the luminaire shall be made using a
heat resistant flexible cable connected to a 2A, 3 pin "plug‐in" type ceiling rose, conduit
box mounted adjacent to the luminaire and accessible on removal of the luminaire.

c. The flexible cable shall be three core type, one core being used as the circuit protective
and earth bonding conductor. Where the cable forms the connection to a tungsten lamp
luminaire it shall be rated for operation at 150C minimum.

3.2.4 PENDANT MOUNTED INSTALLATION

a. Tube pendants shall be mounted from a ball and socket type swivel dome cover plate
fitted to a ceiling mounted metal conduit box and conduit of minimum diameter 20mm.
The conduit entry to the luminaire shall be fitted with a lock nut and a flexible copper
bond shall be provided from the fixed conduit installation to the pendant tube.

b. Proprietary type pendant luminaires, whether single or multi‐lamp units shall be bonded
and provided with suitable terminations to ensure reliable earth continuity throughout
all exposed metalwork.

c. Plain pendants shall consist of a multi‐terminal ceiling rose conforming to BS 67, a
flexible cord of heat resistant cable and a heat resistant lamp holder.

d. Luminaires shall not be suspended by means of flexible cables with the exception of
certain lightweight domestic and commercial types of luminaires, which shall be agreed
with the Employer’s representative.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 5

Section 26 51 00
Lamps & Luminaires CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

e. Suspended luminaires shall be supported by means of purpose manufactured metal

supports.

f. White break joint rings shall be provided between the fittings and conduit box to mask
the joints as deemed necessary by the Employer’s representative.

3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN

3.3.1 Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

3.3.2 Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.4.1 Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been
energized; apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

3.4.2 At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are observed to
be noticeably dimmed after contractor's use and tested.

3.4.3 All luminaires shall be functionally tested to prove that they operate satisfactorily.

3.4.4 Check and record illumination levels in accordance with base built specification and employer’s
requirements.

3.5 EARTHING

3.5.1 Provide equipment earthing connections for all lighting fixtures .

3.5.2 Separate earthing wire should be used between any fixture and panel board. Minimum size
2.5mm2.

3.6 STANDARD SPECIFICATION

The standard specifications for product, service, installation etc. are predominantly based on
relevant BS/EN standards. However, any internationally recognized standard and complying to
intent of the product, service, installation etc. shall also be considered subject to proper
compliance / justification to the satisfaction of Employer’s representative.
END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 5


ANNEXURE – 12
26 5629 SITE LIGHTING

WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001

Section 26 56 29
Site Lighting CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

SECTION 26 56 29
SITE LIGHTING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.0 Scope
1.1 Related Work
1.2 Reference Standards
1.3 Definitions
1.4 Submittals
1.5 Project Record Documents
1.6 Operation and Maintenance Data
1.7 Coordination
1.8 Extra Materials

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Luminaires
2.2 LED Luminaires
2.3 LED Drivers
2.4 Motion Sensors for Bi‐Level Switching
2.5 Fuses
2.6 Wiring Connectors

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Installation
3.2 Field Quality Control
3.3 Adjusting
3.4 Cleaning
3.5 Construction Verification Items
3.6 Agency Training

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 1 of 8

Section 26 56 29
Site Lighting CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.0 SCOPE

The work under this section includes exterior luminaires and accessories, poles, and foundations.
Also included are the following topics:

1.1 RELATED WORK

Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this Section.

Section 26 05 19 – Low‐Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

Wisconsin Administrative Code SPS 362.1807 Shallow Post Foundations

International Building Code IBC 1807.3 Embedded Posts and Poles

RoHS – Restriction of Hazardous Substances. Council of the European Union (EC) Directive
2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and
electronic equipment.

LM‐79‐08 (or latest) – IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of
Solid‐State Lighting Products.

LM‐80‐08 (or latest) – IES Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light
Sources.

TM‐21‐11 (or latest) – IES Technical Memorandum on Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance
of LED Light Sources.

NEMA SSL 1‐2010 (or latest) – Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Driver: The power supply used to power LED luminaires, modules, or arrays.

L70, L70, or L70%: The reported life of an LED component or system to reach 70% lumen
maintenance, or 70% of the LEDs original light output. This test is being developed by the IES and
is currently described by TM‐21‐11.

LEDs: Broadly defined as complete luminaire with light emitting diode (LED) packages, modules,
light bars or arrays, complete with driver.

LED luminaire failure: Negligible light output from more than 10 percent of the LEDs constitutes
luminaire failure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire, pole and base.

Product Data:

For each luminaire type, submit luminaire information including catalog cuts with highlighted
catalog numbers, and required accessories:

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0
On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 2 of 8

Section 26 56 29
Site Lighting CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

a. Luminaire:

 Manufacturer and catalog number,

 Type (identification) as indicated on the plans and schedule,
 Delivered lumens,
 Input watts,
 Efficacy,
 Color rendering index,
 Performance data, and
 Effective Projected Area (EPA).

b. Driver:

 Manufacturer and catalog number,

 Type (Non‐Dimming, Step‐dimming, Continuous dimming, etc.),
 Power Factor, Crest Factor, THD, etc.

c. Pole (if applicable):

 Diameter
 Height
 Pole thickness
 Weight

Manufacturer's Instructions:

Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency
specified under "Regulatory Requirements".

Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and
starting of product.

Light Layout: Provide a computer‐generated factory point‐by‐point foot‐candle layout of the

project for each area involved.

Post Installation Report: Provide to the Engineer and DFD the results of the measured foot‐candle
level for each area involved. Use a measuring device pre‐approved by DFD.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

Accurately record actual locations of each luminaire, pole, and underground circuit.

Provide record drawings of the final, as installed and measured, point‐by‐point foot‐candle layout
for each area involved.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

All operations and maintenance data shall comply with the submission and content requirements
specified under section GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 3 of 8
Section 26 56 29
Site Lighting CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

1.7 COORDINATION

Use bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to install anchor bolts in pole base.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

Provide three (3) percent of each lamp type, but not less than one (1) of each type.

Provide one (1) of each type of LED module, light bar, or array (if applicable). If the LEDs
are integrated into the luminaire and are not separate components, then provide one (1) of
each of these types of luminaires.

Provide one (1) LED driver of each type.

Provide five (5) percent of total fuses provided for each size, but not less than one (1) of each size.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRES

See the Luminaire Schedule on the drawings for type of luminaires and catalog numbers. Catalog
numbers are shown on the drawings for quality and performance requirements only. Luminaires
manufactured by others are equally acceptable provided they meet or exceed the performance of
the indicated luminaires, and meet the intent of the design.

Luminaire shall be certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (UL, ETL, or IEC).

Provide luminaires with quick‐connect disconnecting means, similar to Thomas & Betts Sta‐Kon.

2.2 LED LUMINAIRES

a. LED Luminaires shall meet all DesignLights Consortium® (DesignLights.org) Product
Qualification Criteria. This does not require that the luminaire be listed on the
DesignLights Consortium’s® Qualified Products List, but they must meet the Product
Qualification Criteria. The technical requirements that the luminaire shall meet for each
Application Category are:

 Minimum Light Output.
 Zonal Lumen Requirements.
 Minimum Luminaire Efficacy.
 Minimum CRI.
 L70 Lumen Maintenance.
 Minimum Luminaire Warranty of 5 years (not pro‐rated) to include LED driver
and all LED components.

Additional requirements:

b. Color Temperature of 3000K‐4100K for interior luminaires as listed in the Luminaire
Schedule on the plans. The color temperature of exterior LED luminaires should not
exceed 4100K (nominal).

c. Color Consistency: LED manufacturer shall use a maximum 3‐step MacAdam Ellipse
binning process to achieve consistent luminaire‐to‐luminaire color for interior
luminaires. Exterior luminaires shall use a maximum 5‐step MacAdam Ellipse binning
process.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 4 of 8

Section 26 56 29
Site Lighting CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

d. Glare Control: Exterior luminaires shall meet DesignLights Consortium’s® criteria for
Zonal Lumen Distribution requirements or Backlight‐Uplight‐Glare (BUG) standards for
exterior luminaires.

e. Luminaire shall be mercury‐free, lead‐free, and RoHS compliant.

f. Luminaire shall comply with FCC 47 CFR part 15 non‐consumer RFI/EMI standards.

g. Light output of the LED system shall be measured using the absolute photometry method
following IES LM‐79 and IES LM‐80 requirements and guidelines.

h. Luminaire shall maintain 70% lumen output (L70) for a minimum of 50,000 hours.

i. Lumen output shall not depreciate more than 20% after 10,000 hours of use.

j. Luminaire and driver shall be furnished from a single manufacturer to ensure
compatibility.

k. Luminaire Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be a minimum of 80 for interior luminaires,
and a minimum of 70 for exterior luminaires.

l. LED luminaire shall be thermally designed as to not exceed the maximum junction
temperature of the LED for the ambient temperature of the location the luminaire is to be
installed. Rated case temperature shall be suitable for operation in the ambient
temperatures typically found for the intended installation. Exterior luminaires to operate
in ambient temperatures of ‐40°F to 104°F (‐40°C to 40°C).

m. Luminaire shall operate normally for input voltage fluctuations of plus or minus 10
percent.

n. Luminaire shall have a maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of <20% at full input
power and across specified voltage range.

o. All connections to luminaires shall be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage
protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the installation
process.

p. All luminaires shall be provided with knockouts for conduit connections.

q. The LED luminaire shall carry a limited 5‐year warranty minimum for LED light
engine(s)/board array, and driver(s).

r. Provide all of the following data on submittals:

 Delivered lumens
 Input watts
 Efficacy
 Color rendering index.

LED Luminaires used for Emergency Egress Lighting:

a. The failure of one LED shall not affect the operation of the remaining LEDs.

Emergency LED Luminaire Compatibility with Inverters:

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 5 of 8

Section 26 56 29
Site Lighting CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

a. Emergency Inverters shall be sine‐wave type, or have written confirmation from the
luminaire manufacturer that the luminaire will function with a square‐wave inverter.

2.3 LED DRIVERS

General:

a. Provide driver type (non‐dimmed, step‐dimmed, continuous‐dimming, etc.) as indicated

on the luminaire schedule on the drawings.

b. Minimum Warranty of 5 years (not pro‐rated) to include LED driver and all LED
components.

c. Driver shall have a rated life of 50,000 hours, minimum.

d. Driver and LEDs shall be furnished from a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility.

e. Driver shall have a minimum power factor (pf) of 0.9 and a maximum crest factor (cf) of
1.5 at full input power and across specified voltage range.

f. Driver shall operate normally for input voltage fluctuations of plus or minus 10 percent.

g. Driver shall have a maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of <20% at full input
power and across specified voltage range.

h. Wiring connections to LED drivers shall utilize polarized quick‐disconnects for field
maintenance.

i. Fuse Protections: All luminaires shall have built‐in fuse protection. All power supply
outputs shall be either fuse protected or be Polymeric Positive Temperature Coefficient
(PTC)‐protected as per Class 2 UL listing.

j. Provide all of the following data on submittals:

 Input watts
 Power Factor (pf)
 Crest Factor (cf) at full input power
 Total Harmonic Distortion (THD).

Dimming Drivers:

a. LED driver shall be compatible with dimming controls where dimming is indicated on the
plans. Dimmable drivers shall use Dimming Constant Current (DCC), Constant Voltage, or
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) operation.

b. Step‐Dimming Drivers: Easily switched from 0% to 50% to 100% output power. Both
switch‐leg inputs shall control 50% of the luminaire’s light output equally.

c. Continuous Dimming Drivers: LED luminaires shall dim to (20%, 15%, 10%, 5%, or 0.1%)
as specified in the Luminaire Schedule on the plans without visible flicker or “popcorn
effect”. “Popcorn effect” is defined as the luminaire being on a pre‐set dimmed level (less
than 100%), and going to 100% prior to returning to the pre‐set level when power is
returned to the luminaire. Continuous Dimming Drivers shall use 0‐10V control.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 6 of 8
Section 26 56 29
Site Lighting CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

Drivers for Bi‐Level Switching:

a. Drivers shall be compatible with bi‐level switching control by motion sensors where
indicated on the drawings.

2.4 MOTION SENSORS for BI‐LEVEL SWITCHING

Provide luminaires with motion sensors for bi‐level switching as indicated on the drawings.
Luminaires shall normally operate at a low level during nighttime hours, but shall increase to
100% output when they sense motion. Motion sensor shall be selected based on pole/mounting
height, coverage area, and shall be suitable for operation in the ambient temperatures typically
found for the intended installation. Luminaire shall be compatible with bi‐level switching
operation.

2.5 FUSES

Furnish and install a fuse holder and fuse in each ungrounded leg of the electrical circuit
supplying the outdoor luminaire. If the voltage is 208, 240, or 480 volts, then the fuse holder
needs to be a 2‐pole fuse holder which simultaneously disconnects both ungrounded conductors.
Every luminaire (including bollards) shall be separately fused with a water‐resistant fuse holder.
Size the fuse for the amperage of the luminaire. Tap the circuit conductors with a minimum #10
AWG conductor to serve the luminaire. The fuse and holder shall be accessible through the
handhole. Provide sufficient wire to bring fuse holder outside of handhole.

2.6 WIRING CONNECTORS

Wiring Connectors shall meet the requirements of Section 26 05 19 Low‐Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables.

Twist‐On Wire Connectors: Solderless twist‐on spring connectors (wire‐nuts) with insulating
covers for copper wire splices and taps. All wire connectors used in site lighting applications shall
be silicone gel‐filled twist connectors or connectors designed for damp and wet locations. Gel‐
filled twist‐on connectors may be used for copper conductor sizes 6 AWG and smaller for site
lighting applications. The manufacturer’s wire fill capacity must be followed.

PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

a. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

b. Minimum underground conduit size is 1 inch.
c. Underground and exterior wire shall be minimum #8 AWG conductors, type XHHW‐2 or
USE‐2. #10 AWG conductors shall be utilized for vertical wire installed within pole and for
overall circuit lengths of less than 100 LF.
d. Protect anchor bolts 2 inches (50 mm) minimum above base.
e. Install all anchor bolts and handhole fasteners with anti‐seize compound.
f. Install poles plumb. Provide shims or double nuts to adjust plumb.
g. Use belt slings or non‐chafing ropes to raise and set pre‐finished luminaire poles.
h. Bond each luminaire, each metal accessory, the ground rod and the pole to the branch
circuit equipment ground conductor with a separate ground wire sized per NEC or as
shown on the drawings.

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 7 of 8
Section 26 56 29
Site Lighting CONSISTENT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

i. Dimmed luminaire circuits shall have separate neutrals.

j. Dimmed luminaires shall have a positive OFF, which requires turning off the circuit to the
luminaire so that the luminaires don’t “glow” at the lowest dimmed setting. This shall be
accomplished using a switch, relay, or some other means acceptable to DFD.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and
operation.

3.3 ADJUSTING

Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated on Drawings or as directed by the A/E.

All new lamps shall be operational at the Substantial Completion of the project.

Adjust motion sensors to provide proper coverage for bi‐level switching operation.

3.4 CLEANING

Clean photometric control surfaces.

Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.5 CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION

Contractor is responsible for utilizing the construction verification checklists supplied under
specification Section 26 08 00 in accordance with the procedures defined for construction
verification in Section 01 91 01 or 01 91 02.

3.6 AGENCY TRAINING

All training provided for agency shall comply with the format, general content requirements and
submission guidelines specified under Section 01 91 01 or 01 91 02.

END OF SECTION

Proposed Warehouse for Kizad Logistics Park 4&5 CEC/P347(A)/MEP/SPEC‐R0

On Plot No. KHIA5‐18, Kizad Area, Abu Dhabi.
WorkinProgress Printed By: Al Wasl Al Jadeed Consultants - 05-Jan-2021 - 001 Page 8 of 8